JP6611267B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that controls to a predetermined state such as a game stop when an error occurs (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, priorities are set for various errors, and if the priority of the error that occurred later is higher than the priority of the error that occurred earlier, the error that occurred later instead of the notification of the error that occurred earlier (For example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP 2001-58022 A JP 2010-233715 A

  In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 that is controlled to a predetermined state such as a game stop by the occurrence of an error, as in Patent Document 2, when the priority of the error that occurred later is higher than the priority of the error that occurred earlier However, if an error that occurred later is notified instead of an error that occurred first, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to confirm the event that triggered the control to a predetermined state.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent an event that is triggered to be controlled in a predetermined state from becoming difficult to confirm. And

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) capable of displaying a change and playing a game,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining the occurrence of an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes an abnormality determination process for determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. )When,
When an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, if the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being reported, the notification is terminated, and the determined abnormality is notified Abnormality notification means (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, when an error having a higher priority than the error being notified is determined, if the game stop flag is not set, an error of a high priority error In the error notification process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 by transmitting the designated command to the effect control board 12, the error notification of the error having the high priority is already executed. To be executed instead of)
Based on the abnormality being determined by the abnormality determining means, the state control means for controlling the state corresponding to the determined abnormality (for example, the CPU 103 prohibits the release of the game ball in S411 and sets the game stopped state. Part)
Equipped with a,
And it can be determined more anomalies controlled by the game stopped by the previous SL state control means (e.g., as shown in FIG. 19, can determine a plurality of error of Telecommunications Error magnet errors such as a game stop (abnormal) Part),
The abnormality notification unit, the state being controlled by said state control means, when a predetermined state in which a predetermined external output signal is output (e.g., a game stop state game stop flag is set), the continuing the notification of the abnormality that has become the new event occurred if the priority of the abnormality from the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined condition is high abnormally correspond, an opportunity of the control of the pre-Symbol predetermined state (e.g. In S407 of the main-side error processing, if it is determined that an error having a higher priority than the error being reported is determined and the game stop flag is set, an error designation command for an error having a higher priority is set. By not transmitting to 12, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 does not execute the error notification of the high priority error, and the error is already being executed. Part to continue the notification),
The output of the predetermined external output signal does not change even when a new event corresponding to an abnormality having a high priority of the abnormality occurs,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an event that has been triggered by the predetermined state from being difficult to confirm. Also, it is possible to determine more abnormalities that result in a game stop state.

The gaming machine of means 1 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The state control means can be controlled to a game stop state as a state corresponding to the abnormality (for example, when the CPU 103 determines the occurrence of an error corresponding to the game stop, the game ball prohibits the launch of the game ball in S411. And the part to be in a game stop state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to stop the game when it is determined to be abnormal, and to prevent the event that triggered the game stop state from being difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or means 1,
When an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, an external output unit (for example, a security signal is output) that can output a predetermined external output signal (for example, a security signal) to the outside of the gaming machine in a state corresponding to the abnormality. Terminal board 16)
The predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined external output signal is output (for example, in a modified example, the security signal is output as a state in which the security signal is output as the predetermined state) In the state, it is characterized in that the part that continues to report the error that is already being executed).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an event corresponding to the output of the external output signal from becoming difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, means 1, and means 2,
A plurality of movable bodies (for example, a plurality of accessories in a modified example) provided so as to be operable at a position away from the origin position and overlapping at least a part of the operation range;
Detection means capable of detecting that the movable body is located at the origin position (for example, an origin sensor capable of detecting that each accessory is located at the origin position in the modification);
With
The abnormality determining means can determine a movable body abnormality based on an event in which the movable body is not detected by the detecting means for each of the plurality of movable bodies (for example, in each modification, for each accessory , Home return error (abnormal) judgment part)
The state control means is configured to set each of the plurality of movable bodies to an operation prohibited state (for example, a dead end state in a modified example, based on the determination of the abnormality of the movable body by the abnormality determination means. Each part is inoperable)
When the movable body abnormality is determined for one movable body among a plurality of movable bodies, the determination of the movable body abnormality or the notification of the movable body abnormality is not performed for the other movable bodies (for example, in a modified example, When an origin return error (abnormality) is determined for one accessory, the origin return error (abnormality) is not determined or notified for other accessories (movable bodies)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load due to unnecessary abnormality determination, and it is possible to identify the movable body that has caused the operation prohibited state.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, means 1 to means 3 ,
Based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered a specific area (for example, the third count switch 24B of the second special variable winning ball device 7B), control is performed to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player. A possible gaming machine,
Comprising vibration detecting means (for example, vibration sensor 80) capable of detecting abnormal vibration;
The abnormality determination means can determine vibration abnormality when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration detection means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 determines vibration detection 1 error in the abnormality determination processing).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to determine that a fraud in which a game medium enters a specific area by vibration is abnormal.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 3, and means 5 ,
Predetermined areas in which prize balls are paid out when the game ball passes (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second start winning port, a first special variable winning ball device 7A serving as a big winning port, and a second special variable winning device). Ball device 7B, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first start winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as a general winning region,
Information display means provided on a main board (for example, the main board 11) for controlling a game and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, run ratio, role ratio) regarding award balls paid out by passing the game balls to a predetermined area. (For example, display monitor 29);
With
The information display means is provided on a main board for controlling a game so that visibility is not hindered.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following means 7 to means 13. Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines can perform variable display. As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-093047 (paragraphs 0212 to 0259, FIGS. 18 to 23), in such a gaming machine, the display mode changes in a plurality of stages, such as a meter display. Thus, it is possible to execute a suggestion display that suggests a degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player and to change the display mode of the suggestion display after displaying an effect image such as an effect. However, in such a gaming machine, since the suggestion display is always displayed, for example, when a special effect such as a reach effect is executed, the suggestion display may interfere with the special effect. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the suggestion display from interfering with the special effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of means 7 is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) capable of performing a variable display,
Suggestion display execution means (for example, a meter MT as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58) capable of executing an suggestion display that suggests an expectation that is advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of stages. Production control CPU90120, etc.)
Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (meter effect) that can change the display mode of the suggestion display (for example, as shown in FIGS. , An effect that changes the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit value (level 4 (MAX)), an effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit value of the meter, the type and number of items Effect control CPU90120, etc. capable of executing an effect of changing the character (size, color, number, etc.), an effect of increasing or decreasing the number, etc.)
The suggestion display that is being executed during the variable display is once erased in response to the start of the execution of a special effect (for example, a normal reach effect or reach advancement effect), and then replayed according to the execution of the change effect. Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the meter MT and the like are once erased at the start of the execution of reach development propriety effect, and then the movable effect member 9060 operates. An effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing an effect of redisplaying the meter MT or the like in accordance with the development of super reach.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the suggestion display from interfering with the special effect in the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine described in means 7,
Predetermined display means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing the chance character image 9055 as shown in FIG. 62) capable of executing a predetermined display (for example, display of the chance character image 9055) during execution of the special effect. In addition,
The predetermined display means executes the predetermined display in a display area at least partially overlapping the display area where the suggestion display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the display area of the meter MT, the chance character image, 9055 display area overlaps at least partly).
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the visibility from being lowered due to the suggestion display and the predetermined display overlapping during execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to means 7 or 8,
Re-displaying the suggestion display once deleted is executed when the change effect is executed during the execution of the special effect (for example, S90707, S90708 in FIG. 62 (D2), FIG. 63, FIG. 64, etc.). ).
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the control related to the suggestion display and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any of means 7 to 9, wherein
The suggestion display control means can execute display control for continuing the erased state of the suggestion display once erased when the execution of the special effect is started (for example, continuing the erased state of the meter MT) The display control according to the first modification is a feature.
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the control related to the suggestion display and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any of means 7 to 10,
The suggestion display control means once erases the suggestion display when the display mode of the suggestion display when the execution of the special effect is started is the first display mode, and the execution of the special effect is started. When the display mode of the suggestion display is the second display mode, the suggestion display is not temporarily erased (for example, when the display value of the meter MT is less than a predetermined value at the start of reach development effect) Is temporarily deleted, and when the display value of the meter MT is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the meter MT is not temporarily deleted.
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the control related to the suggestion display and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to means 11, wherein
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a notice effect in a meter change notification mode as shown in FIG. 56),
The aspect in which the change effect execution means changes the display mode of the suggestion display in the change effect depending on whether the specific effect is executed or not executed before the change effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 56, the super reach is performed when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed and not executed before the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed). This is characterized in that the amount of change in the meter when changing the display mode of the meter MT in the meter effect during the effect, and the amount of the oval displayed as the predetermined effect are different.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect that can change the display mode of the suggestion display.

The gaming machine described in means 13 is the gaming machine described in any one of means 7 to means 12,
Adjustment image display means that can display an adjustment image for adjusting the effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, when the volume is adjusted, an adjustment result image indicating the adjustment result of the volume is displayed on the image display device. And the adjustment image display means responds to the fact that the display result of the variable display is derived in response to the fact that the display result of the variable display is derived. It is characterized by making the image invisible or difficult to view (for example, erasing the adjustment result image R in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the display result of the variable display that is derived and displayed.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which shows the game machine in an Example. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table (for 1st special symbol), (C) is a big hit classification determination table (2nd special symbol) (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for V winning), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on an accessory ratio display apparatus, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. . It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize information processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize information display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main side error process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various errors and the priority of an error, cancellation conditions, etc. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the alerting | reporting error, the possibility of a game, and the output condition of a security signal. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit | ending process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main-side error processing in Modification 1; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of sub-side error processing in Modification 2. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a special figure display result. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special aspect super reach production | presentation determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a meter production | presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a MAX timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the arrival level determination table during high-speed fluctuation | variation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the meter production | presentation determination table used as a gas. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the final arrival level determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the arrival level determination table during high-speed fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a notice effect execution period determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a tilt production | presentation determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach production operation control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of execution timings, such as meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation screen at the time of performing meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation screen at the time of performing meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation screen at the time of performing meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of the display screen at the time of displaying an adjustment result image etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the display period of an adjustment result image, and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a figure which shows the example of the display screen at the time of displaying an adjustment result image. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen of the redisplay effect after erasing a meter once. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing which shows execution timings, such as a meter effect, when a re-display effect is performed after erasing a meter once. It is a flowchart which shows a re-display effect process after erasing a meter once.

  An example of the form for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples. In the following, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, a portion described as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. Note that the front surface of the gaming board 2 is covered with a glass door frame 3a provided on the gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 so as to be opened and closed. The glass door frame 3a can be opened by an attendant of the game hall by inserting the release key into the unlocking lock K and unlocking it, and general players cannot open the glass door frame 3a. It is like that.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, a segment or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like, and a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. . In the above description, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are illustrated in a rectangular shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4A The segments constituting the 2 special symbol display 4B may be irregularly arranged.

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, for example, there are three corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. In the effect symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display parts, the effect symbols (also referred to as “decorative symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. And, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, changes in the effect symbols (eg, vertical scroll display) are started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game, the effect display devices 5L, 5C, and 5R in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas Then, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the result of variation display of the production symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the variable display using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the variable display using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronism with the above, a variation display of a plurality of types of effect symbols each identifiable is performed, and a definite effect symbol that is a variation display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, to display and display various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols, the identification information such as effect symbols is stopped and displayed (also called “complete stop display” or “final stop display”), and the variable display is terminated. It is to let you. On the other hand, during the variation display from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the display of the definite production symbol that is the variation display result, the variation rate of the production symbol becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not deterministically displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include a complete stop display of the effect symbol for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, nine character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. The production symbols are not limited to nine types, and may be any number (for example, eight types, ten types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  After the variation display of the effect symbols is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the finalized effect symbols that are the variation display results are derived and displayed. , For example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the smallest to the largest, and when the effect symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “9”) is displayed, The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” effect symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 5, a first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are arranged. In the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U, hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed or the pachinko machine When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not satisfied because 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. The hold memory display in the first hold memory display area 5D is a hold memory display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, and in the second hold memory display area 5U. The on-hold storage display is a on-hold storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, the hold storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is displayed in a round white display (the hold displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D). Memory display), and the hold storage display generated based on the start winning by passing the game ball through (entering) the second start winning opening is a circular white display (the hold displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U) Memory display). Note that, based on the start storage prize generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening, and based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening. The display mode of the hold storage display generated in this manner may be a different display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special figure reserved memories is specified at the upper part of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B together with the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for possible display. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory for which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure holding memory number is the number of memories for which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  General winning ports 50A and 50D are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5, and general winning ports 50B and 50C are provided below the general winning ports 50A. Also, below the effect display device 5, there are provided a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in a normal open state (see the solid line position in FIG. 1) and a tilt position (see the dotted line position in FIG. 1), which are in the vertical position, by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. And a normal starting member having a movable wing piece that changes to an expanded open state, and forms a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  The game balls that have passed (entered) through the general winning ports 50A, 50B, 50C, 50D are the first general winning port switch 26A, the second general winning port switch 26B, the third general winning port switch 26C, shown in FIG. It is detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  A special variable winning ball unit 7 in which the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B are integrated is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Yes.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 7 will be described. In addition, in the following description, it demonstrates on the basis of the up-down and left-right direction when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is seen from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball unit 7 includes a first special variable winning ball device 7A on the left side and a second special variable winning ball device 7B on the right side. Further, a cover body (not shown) made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 7, and the player can pass the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. 7, especially the game ball flowing down in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B can be visually recognized.

  The first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A includes a first big prize opening door 701 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the first big prize opening door 701 changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the first grand prize opening. The first grand prize opening is formed to open upward at the left part of the special variable winning ball unit 7. Note that the first grand prize opening door 701 is slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position where the first big prize opening is closed by driving the solenoid 82 and an open position where the first big prize opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the first grand prize opening door 701 opens the first big winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning opening. Make it easy to do. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the first grand prize opening door 701 closes the first big prize opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first big prize opening. As described above, the first big winning opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for a player through which a game ball easily passes (enters) and a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the first grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, the game ball has a partially open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter). It may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23 by passing through a first count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first big prize opening. . The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 23 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of game balls by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first special winning opening which has been opened in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special prize winning device 7A is in the open state in the first special variable prize winning ball device 7A, the game ball can enter the first big prize winning port, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A, if the first grand prize opening is closed, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the first big winning opening. Thus, the second state is disadvantageous for the player.

  Further, most of the game balls that have flowed down without entering the first grand prize opening are guided to the normally variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like (not shown). 2 The winning prize opening is designed to win.

  The second special variable winning ball device 7B shown in FIG. 8 is formed to project upward from the first special variable winning ball device 7A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 2). A prize opening door 711 is provided, and the second big prize opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second big prize opening door 711. The second big prize opening is formed to open upward at the upper end portion of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B. The second grand prize opening door 711 is between a first state (open state) in which the second big prize opening is opened by driving the solenoid 83 and a second state (closed state) in which the second big prize opening is closed. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the second big winning gate door 711 is in the ON state, the second big winning port door 711 opens the second big winning port and the game ball is in the second state. Make it easy to pass (enter) through the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second grand prize opening door 711 is in the OFF state, the second big prize opening door 711 closes the second big prize opening and the game ball passes through the second grand prize opening. (Entrance) can not be. As described above, the second grand prize opening is changed between an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the second grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, the game ball has a partially open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter). It may be provided.

  A game ball passing (entering) through the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch 24A by passing through the second count switch 24A installed in the second big prize opening shown in FIG. . Based on the detection of game balls by the second count switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the second big prize opening opened in the second special variable prize winning ball device 7B, for example, other normal prizes such as the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening. More prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) through the mouth. Therefore, when the second special prize winning device 7B is in the open state in the second special variable prize winning ball device 7B, the game ball can enter the second great prize winning port, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special prize winning device 7B is closed in the second special variable prize winning ball device 7B, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the second major prize winning port. Thus, the second state is disadvantageous for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B, there is formed a game ball flow path 750 through which the game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening can flow down. The game ball flow path 750 includes a main path 740 (a region along the solid line in FIG. 8) through which the game ball that has passed the second grand prize opening can pass, and a branch path 741 that branches from the main path 740 (in the dotted line in FIG. 8). Area). A backflow preventing member 730, which will be described later, is disposed between the main path 740 and the branch path 741. Further, a first branch portion 742 where the branch path 741 branches from the main path 740 is provided on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740. In addition, a second branch portion 743 where a branch path 741 branches from the main path 740 is provided. That is, the game ball flowing down the main path 740 can move from the first branch part 742 or the second branch part 743 to the branch path 741 side.

  A third count switch 24B through which a game ball can pass is installed at the most downstream portion of the main path 740, and the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B, and is thereby moved by the third count switch 24B. Detected. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 24B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. The game ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , Detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

  In this embodiment, the game state after the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B during the small hit game described later. . Therefore, during the period in which the second big prize opening door 711 is open during the small hit game, the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration or the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 742 in the main path 740, a regulating member 721 that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 24B is provided. The restricting member 721 protrudes into the main path 740 by driving the solenoid 85 (see FIG. 2), thereby restricting the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 24B in the main path 740, and By retreating from the main path 740, the game ball is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction between an allowable state in which the game ball is allowed to flow toward the third count switch 24B in the main path 740.

  The upper portion of the regulating member 721 is formed as a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided in the main path 740 so as to be inclined at a predetermined angle toward the branch path 741 in a front view. . For this reason, when the game ball flows down the main path 740 when the regulation member 721 is in the regulation state, the game ball moves along the flat surface formed on the upper part of the regulation member 721 along the second branch portion 743. It is guided so as to flow down toward the branch path 741.

  A backflow preventing member 730 is pivotally supported between the main path 740 and the branch path 741 by a pivot shaft facing in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 730 is a plate-like member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when a game ball guided on the flat surface of the regulating member 721 comes in contact with the main path 740 side, the branch path from the main path 740 side It can be moved (rotated) so as to be able to pass to the 741 side. Specifically, it is rotatable between a permissible position that inclines so as to open between the main path 740 and the branch path 741 and a restriction position that closes between the main path 740 and the branch path 741. Is provided. A rib 801 protruding forward is provided above the restricting member 721, and the backflow preventing member 730 contacts the rib 801 from the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front at the restricting position.

  Note that the backflow prevention member 730 is normally arranged at a restricted position by its own weight, and at this restricted position, a game ball guided on a flat surface comes into contact with the main path 740 side (right side in front view). When it is pushed by the game ball, it rotates clockwise in front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width dimension between the front end portion of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the main path in which the third count switch 24B is provided The game ball is allowed to move from the 740 side to the branch path 741 where the fourth count switch 24C is provided. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 730 is in the restricted position, the backflow prevention member 730 is in contact with the rib 801 even if the game ball abuts from the branch path 741 side (left side in front view). The rotation of the member 730 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, since the width dimension between the front end portion of the backflow preventing member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the fourth count switch 24C is provided. The movement of the game ball from the branch path 741 side to the main path 740 side where the third count switch 24B is provided is reliably restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 1, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41. The passing gate 41 is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the special variable winning ball unit 7. A gate switch 21 described later is built in the passage gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, a winning opening other than the above-described winning holes may be provided. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 7 and the like) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to the lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing.

  The upper plate member that forms the upper plate includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided.

  The game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decoration frame that surrounds the effect display device 5 disposed at a substantially central position of the game area. A game ball that has been launched weakly (left-handed) flows down the left game area, and a game ball that has been launched strongly by the batting operation handle (right-handed) flows down the right game area.

  Also, the game balls that have flowed down the left game area can win the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the game balls that have flowed down the right game area are the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the first special variable. A number of obstacle nails are arranged so that the winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B can win and pass through the passing gate 41. That is, in the case of left-handed, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A and the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B cannot win, and the passage gate 41 cannot pass.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes a normal symbol variation display such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. Normal symbol display based on the fact that the normal diagram start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, for example, that the previous variation variation display has been completed The change display of the usual figure by the vessel 20 is started.

  In this normal variation display, after the normal symbol variation is started, when a predetermined time which is the normal variation time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol which is the normal symbol variation display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “usually lost”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the enlargement / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure variable display by the first special symbol display 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the previous special figure fluctuation display or the end of the big hit gaming state, the special figure fluctuation display by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, after the variation display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed after starting the variation display of the special symbol, A definite special symbol (variation display result) that is a variation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. The After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the loss symbol in the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A is different from each symbol in the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common special symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special symbols.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes the “big hit” as the specific display result, the first special winning ball gate device 7A of the first special variable winning ball device 7A in the jackpot gaming state. 701 opens the first big prize opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the 1st special variable winning ball apparatus 7A the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big prize opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). Even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won the first big prize opening). Also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the specific display result in the special symbol variable display and becomes the “small hit” as the specific display result, in the small hit gaming state, the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B The second grand prize opening door 711 opens the second big prize opening during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. State. Thus, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is in a first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player.

  In the small hit gaming state, the second grand prize opening door 711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it open | release several times in a hit game state.

  In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big prize opening passes the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B. It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on detecting the passing of the gaming ball through the third count switch 24B. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes through the fourth count switch 24C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it does not become "big hit". In other words, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on detecting the passing of the gaming ball through the fourth count switch 24C.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, the second special prize winning ball door 711 of the second special variable winning ball device 7B is set to a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second big prize opening is opened. Thereby, the round game which makes the 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus 7B the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled to the first state when controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, but is not limited to this. Instead, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second grand prize opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won the second grand prize opening). Good.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state is finished, there are a short time state in which the time reduction control (short time control) is performed within a predetermined range of the number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times or 20 times) and a normal state in which the short time control is not performed It is controlled by either. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure fluctuation display is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, after the end of the big hit gaming state, a special number of fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times), the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, What is necessary is just to complete | finish, when any conditions among the game balls passing the 3rd count switch 24B are satisfied previously.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the control for reducing the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B as compared with the normal state, The control for shortening the fluctuation time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the normal figure by the symbol display 20 than in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of the usual figure each time is “per normal figure”. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal” is set to the tilt control time in the normal state. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control for making it longer than the time and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state, thereby increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. By the player Advantageous to become control is performed taking. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special figure variation display can be executed frequently. Next, the time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a terminal board (information output board) 16 as shown in FIG. ing. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 has various winning information relating to winning. The function to display is also provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 has a magnetic sensor 60 for detecting fraud due to magnets, a radio wave sensor 70 for detecting fraud due to electromagnetic waves, and a pachinko gaming machine 1 that vibrates the game ball. Vibration sensor 80 for detecting fraud such as changing the course of the game, door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and opening of the first grand prize opening door 701 The first grand prize opening door sensor 91 for detecting the second grand prize opening door sensor 92 for detecting the opening of the second big prize opening door 711, and a path through which the game ball flows down to the lower plate. Various sensors such as a full tank sensor 93 for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate and a ball break sensor 94 for detecting that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is less than a predetermined number Are connected and these Based on the detection signal output from the sensor, also has function of determining the occurrence of various abnormal (error). In FIG. 2, the ball break sensor 94 is shown as being directly connected to the main board 11, but in reality, it is connected to the payout board and connected via the payout board. Yes.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. An output circuit 111 for transmitting solenoid drive signals to the solenoids 81 to 83 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 16 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 2 is enclosed in a board case 201, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of the main board 11. Yes. The display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main board 11 when visually recognized. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. It is a front side of the case and is different from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) has each prize opening (first grand prize opening, second big prize opening, second start prize opening, first start prize opening, first to fourth general prizes. Mouth, hereinafter referred to as “entry area”), and the number of game balls that enter the game is counted, and various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29. By displaying these winning information, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. That is, it is normal for the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning opening as frequently as designed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize what adjustments have been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

  The output circuit 111 is also connected to a controller 84 for driving the solenoid 85. The controller 84 starts driving control of the solenoid 85 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 111 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. When the controller 84 drives the solenoid 85, the regulating member 721 repeats the regulated state and the allowed state every second regardless of the gaming state.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 5, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. Command 81XXH is an effect that is displayed in a varying manner in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the special symbol change display in the special game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “out of”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, Different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variation display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C”. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined determination result that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the variation of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time reduction control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a gaming state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state) , The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the short time state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19, it is determined which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process (see FIG. 30) described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set in accordance with the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning mouth opening notification command and the big winning mouth opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second reserved memory display area 5U or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D100 is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the V winning is achieved, that is, that the third count switch 24B is turned on because the game ball has passed the third count switch 24B.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal display result and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern. Corresponding to each of the cases where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” among the cases where the variation display result is “out of”, and the variation display result is “big hit” A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect design is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out of variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “out of”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... A normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... May be provided in addition to super reach α and super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β that are the super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed, the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed is more super-reach. The special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the α super reach production is executed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set higher. In the reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by first determining the type of fluctuation pattern such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is used. The variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined after the variation pattern type is determined first. It may be constant.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 6 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table shown in FIG. 6 (A), a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 6 (B), and a jackpot type shown in FIG. 6 (C). In addition to the determination table (for the second special symbol) and the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 6 (D), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the deviation variation pattern determination A table (not shown), a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the subject of fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but a judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, only the big win can be won, and the small win is not generated.

  When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, a big hit will occur with the same probability as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target, and half of these judgment values correspond to a small hit. By being set as a judgment value, when the second special symbol is the target of variable display, the winning is a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 50% (100/200). .

  That is, when the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit shown in FIG. 6A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to the small hit shown in FIG. 6A, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 6A indicates the probability (ratio) of being a big hit and the probability (ratio) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  The CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6A to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are separately provided. The determination of the big hit is made using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. This determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second case.

  In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won. However, a part of the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit may be won.

  FIGS. 6B and 6C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 6 (B) shows a case in which the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). It is a table. FIG. 6C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). It is a table.

  The big hit type determination table is one of the big hit types A to C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. As shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C, the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) has three types of big hits from big hit A to big hit C. In the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), only one type of big hit C, big hit C, is provided. That is, the big hit that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of the three types of big hits from the big hit A to the big hit C, while the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The big hit that occurs at the time is only the big hit C.

  FIG. 6D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table determines whether the small hit type is small hit A or small hit B based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when a V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game with the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. When the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when a V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game with the big hit type being the big hit E is executed. It has become so. In other words, these big hits D and big hits E are not big hit types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game balls during the small hit games of either the small hit A or the small hit B Is a jackpot type determined by whether or not it has passed through the third count switch 24B.

  Here, the jackpot type will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (E). As the jackpot type, the jackpot A and jackpot D in which the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the time-shortening control after the jackpot gaming state ends. The big hit B, the big hit C, and the big hit E are set.

  Of these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit A ends, the time-shortening control is not executed.

  The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first big prize opening is changed to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is finished, the time-shortening control is executed until 20 special figure games are executed or until a big hit occurs again until 20 special figure games are executed.

  The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the first big prize opening is changed to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit C is finished, the time-shortening control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed or until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed.

  The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big prize opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit gaming state of big hit D is completed, the time-shortening control is not executed.

  The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) for changing the second big prize opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit E is finished, the time-shortening control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed or until the big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed.

  Note that, in the short-time state, the probability of being “per normal” increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the short-time state, there is a case where a big hit occurs as a result of displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and there is a case where a big win occurs when a game ball wins a V during a small hit game. It becomes a so-called villa state that is likely to occur continuously without going through the state.

  In the short-time state after the big hit game of the big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which the short-time control is executed is set to 20, the rate at which the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state (The total of the ratio of occurrence of jackpots as a result of fluctuation display of the special chart game during the 20 special chart games and the ratio of occurrence of jackpots when the game ball wins V) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the short-time state after the big hit game of big hit C and big hit E, since the number of special-purpose games for which the short-time control is executed is set to 100 times, the big hit game state is continuously set without going through the normal state. The rate of occurrence (the sum of the rate at which a big hit is generated as a result of fluctuation display of the special figure game during 100 special figure games and the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit is generated) is set to almost 100%. .

  In this embodiment, five types of big hits A to E are provided as the big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hits may be provided. The following may be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299. , 150 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. For this reason, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, the time-shortening control is not executed at the end of the big hit game at a rate of 50%. Further, when the time-shortening control is executed after the big hit game is finished, the number of special-purpose games for which the time-shortening control is executed is determined to be 20 times at a rate higher than 100 times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), all ranges (0 to 299) of the MR2 determination value ranges 0 to 299 are jackpot C Therefore, after the big hit game is over, the number of special-purpose games for which the time reduction control is always executed is determined to be 100 times.

  As shown in FIG. 6D, in the small hit type determination table, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299. Is assigned to the small hit B. For this reason, when a V-winning big win occurs during the small hit game, the number of special-purpose games in which the short-time control is executed after the big hit game ends at a rate of 75% is determined to be 100 times. Thus, the time-shortening control is not executed after the big hit game at the rate of 25%.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. A jackpot variation pattern determination table used when the determination is made in advance, and a deviation variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “out of range” are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns of normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. It should be noted that when these jackpot values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and when the big hit type is “big hit A”, the super reach is determined. By assigning α so that it can be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that it will be “big hit B” or “big hit C” is increased. it can.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random value out of a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits is a determination value. Assigned as. Although only PC1-1 is provided as the small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as the small hit variation pattern. Good.

  Further, the deviation variation pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storage patterns is 1 or less, and when the total number of reserved storage is 2 to 4 is used. Outlier variation pattern determination table B, outlier variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed The deviation variation pattern determination table D used for the above is prepared.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α variation variation pattern (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern (PA2-3) of reach β out of a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern determining random pattern MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination (PA2-2) and the super-reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). It has been. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern determining random pattern MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination (PA2-2) and the super-reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). It has been. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control. (PA2-2), a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-shortening non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-1). The non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time than -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach deviation variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. When the start prize is won, it becomes difficult to generate useless start prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and there is no non-reach fluctuation By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time for the variable display.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 7 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 7 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, are reserved data. This is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of the result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit.

  The second special figure storage unit 151B has been started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, are reserved data. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of the result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure hold storage unit 151C associates with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number which updates the numerical data which shows the random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production | presentation display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for production control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 12, as with the main board 11, for example, random values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect are set.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used, a display screen for displaying various types of errors (abnormalities), a lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, an error notification pattern such as output sound, and the like are stored. Yes. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. The notice effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, in the effect control counter setting unit, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, a start winning buffer for performing hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is set in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The start winning buffer is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the first special figure reserved memory. In each storage area, data indicating the presence / absence of a start prize (specifically, “0” indicating no start prize and “1” indicating the presence of a start prize) is stored. Note that the data of these start winning buffers is the effect control described later in response to the reception of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, and the reception of the first variation start command and the second variation start command. While being updated in the hold display update process (S72, see FIG. 29) in the process, the hold in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is based on the updated start winning buffer data. The stored display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first start opening winning designation command is received based on the start winning at the first start winning opening, a round white is displayed on the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D. While a new display is added, when the first variation start command is received based on the newly started variation of the first special figure, among the held storage displays in the first reserved storage display area 5D, The high-order (the first memory that holds the winning start) will be erased, and the other round white display will be shifted (moved) in the specified direction (for example, left). Update. Similarly, when the second start opening winning designation command is received based on the start winning at the second start winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the hold storage display in the second hold storage display area 5U. When a second change start command is received based on the fact that the second special figure has started to be newly added, the highest level among the hold storage displays in the second hold storage display area 5U ( Update the hold display so that the round white display of the hold memory that was awarded first is erased and the other round white display is shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, left). To do.

  Here, the display of the total of game balls on the main board 11 and the ratio of the objects will be described.

  The main board 11 has information relating to game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (hews), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), and the first grand prize. The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls for winning and entering the second grand prize winning opening (attacker) are entered and counted, and the display monitor 29 displays the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening among the total number of winning balls. (%), Which is the ratio of the number of winning balls due to winning (Attacker), the number of winning balls and the first big winning opening for winning the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning the second big winning opening (attacker), is displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive consecutive feature winning balls) obtained by winning the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio means the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in winning the first and second winning winning openings (attackers) ( It is the ratio of the following number of winning balls). The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is based on the number of winning balls in the 1st Grand Prize Winner and the 2nd Grand Prize Winner (Attacker) and the 2nd starting prize opening (Den Chu) Number of winning balls and winning balls by winning in winning holes (first starting prize opening, general winning prize opening) other than the first big prize opening, the second big prize winning opening (Attacker), and the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu) The sum of numbers. The first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening (attacker), and the second starting prize opening (electrical chew) are variable actors, and the winning range of the game ball is changed by changing the passable width of the game ball. It is an accessory whose expected ratio varies. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning opening, the second winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed roles, The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the number of winning balls (the number of general winning balls), the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) with 6000 winning balls, 2 Awards for winning the winning prizes at the starting prize winning opening (Den Chu), winning the number of regular electric roles (Den Choi winning ball), the 1st grand prize opening and the 2nd big winning prize (attacker) The number of special electric role awards (the number of attackers) that is the number of balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric roles The number of winning balls (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 is stored in an equivalent amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated.

  The display monitor 29 switches and displays the continuous ratio (%), the winning ratio (%), and the cumulative connecting ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 6000 pieces at predetermined time intervals (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of award balls won by winning at the first starting hole (hews) counted by the progress of the game, winning at the second starting winning hole (electric chew) The number of winning balls due to, and the number of winning balls due to winning at the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 is reflected in the ratio (%) for 60000 displayed after that, There may be a discrepancy between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (hews), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), winning at the first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker) If the number of award balls and the total number of award balls are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%), etc.), such a discrepancy is caused. Can be prevented.

  As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (Den Chu) and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the ratio of the winning combination (ratio (%)) in the case where the number of winning winning balls, which is the total of the winning balls due to winning, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker and electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. For this reason, a connection ratio can be calculated | required by following (1) Formula. Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).

  Connection ratio = [number of consecutive winning balls / total number of winnings] × 100 (1)

  Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

  When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 and rounding down to 3 decimal places after 0.70. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the arithmetic operation after the decimal point, the operation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of the long-term bonuses. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation with the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 60 h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

The substrate case 201 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation with the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 60 h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  Also, a storage area for storing information related to game winnings (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (totaling information related to game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer) may be stored continuously without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after being performed. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value where the error is maximum is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the exact value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, the duty ratio (%) (or continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter, the display of the role (%) and the continuous ratio (%) is not performed on the display monitor Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) on 7 segments, and switches and displays each value for every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to an electric chew or an attacker, and the value calculated in accordance with the event is displayed after 30 seconds. %), There is a possibility that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 9A, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the game medium is detected by a sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew, and each winning ball number is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game media won by the attacker and the game media won by the electric chew are joined is used based on the detection result. You may make it total the number of object acquisition spheres and the number of consecutive object acquisition spheres.

  Hereinafter, the display of the ratio ratio will be described more specifically. The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). In addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided on the back side of the game board 2.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth counter A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes of the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening (attacker) is exemplified by the big winning prize counter, but the present invention is not limited to this. A first grand prize counter that counts the number of winning prizes to the first grand prize opening and a second grand prize counter that counts the number of winning prizes to the second grand prize opening are individually provided. The number of wins to the mouth and the number of wins to the second grand prize port may be separately counted, and the number of wins may be summed to obtain the number of wins to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  Note that a clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch, data used for the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the link ratio and the role ratio has to be performed again, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the link ratio and the role ratio. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal linkage ratio and a hand ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing data.

  As described above, the RTC 106 is provided on the main board 11, and the current time can be detected by the RTC 106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but the RTC 106 is capable of measuring the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is accommodated in the board case 201 as shown in FIG. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201. Since the caulking pin 11B is provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and an illegal act on the main board 11 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

  The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a seal seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 11S is pasted across, for example, the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The seal seal 11S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position that is not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

  The display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D is configured by 7 segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8”, and dots disposed on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 9B is displayed on the display monitor 29. The total period is displayed on the first display portion 29A and the second display portion 29B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display portion 29C and the fourth display portion 29D of the lower two digits. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No3, the total cumulative ratio is displayed, and in display No2, the total cumulative ratio is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the run ratio and the hand ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the winning ratio is the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state of the total winning balls and the winning winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is good also as a ratio which the number of prize balls by winning a prize occupies.

  When the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed, the first “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B display the short-term ratio as a percentage (% display), and display the short-term ratio of display No2. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  When calculating the run ratio and the ratio, the main board 11 starts from the first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening (attacker), the first starting prize opening, the second starting prize opening, and the first general prize opening. 4 The number of game balls that have entered the general prize opening is counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 performs the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning port switch 26A to the fourth general port. Switch processing for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning prize switch 26D is performed.

  In this switch process, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A, the value of the large winning number counter is added. When a detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, By adding the values of the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter, the number of game balls entering the respective entry areas ( To aggregate the winning number) of the sphere. Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch process), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a general winning mouth winning ball (a winning ball by winning from the first general winning mouth to the fourth general winning mouth (sode)), 1st starting prize mouth ball (award ball by winning the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning an electric Chu), special electric role award ball (winning an attacker) Is the number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are counted. The number of winning game balls to may be summed up. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first start mouth prize ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of the first start mouth prize ball are calculated. May be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 102 includes an association ratio storage area for storing the combinations and association ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative amount. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role and run ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls in each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative. In addition, it is stored in the linkage ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and the linkage ratio. Each of the combination ratio combination ratio storage areas for storing the ratios and the combination ratios of the 10 sets and the total cumulative number is composed of a counter of 1 byte at maximum. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the total ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 12 shows a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 12, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area in the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H is a hexadecimal number. The same applies hereinafter). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. In this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register through this register area and transfers it to the register. Write the data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 102 or transfers it to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is configured with a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. Has been. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as “control program data”) is temporarily stored, and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area is referred to by the control program. Reference data (for example, the above-described various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  In addition, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination ratio storage area. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area, and 10 sets of ratio ratio storage areas. It should be noted that the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area respectively store data having different subroutine start addresses.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) is stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio and the role ratio. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 14A is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 14A, when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No1, the letter “y” is displayed on the first display section 29A and the letter “6.” is displayed on the second display section 29B, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 14B-2, the letter “y” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and the letter “7.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 14B-3, the letter “A” is displayed on the first display section 29A, and the letter “6.” is displayed on the second display section 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative continuous ratio is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 14 (B-4), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 14 (B-5), the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Moreover, the display color is only green for the short-term consecutive ratio of display No1, and the total cumulative ratio of short-term roles for display No2 to display No4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, and the total cumulative combined ratio every 30 seconds.

  On the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the total and total cumulative for 10 sets and the storage of the combined ratio storage area for storing the ratios and continuous ratios of the 10 sets and total cumulative are updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 15, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66”, respectively. “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. For this reason, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. Data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port to pass through the switch circuit 110. Switch 22B, 1st count switch 23, 2nd count switch 24A, 3rd count switch 24B, 4th count switch 24C, 1st general prize port switch 26A, 2nd general prize port switch 26B, 3rd general prize port switch 26C , The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the fourth general prize opening switch 26D is determined, and addition to the winning number counter corresponding to each switch is executed (S11).

  Subsequently, when a winning occurs, that is, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, the first general winning port switch 26A, the second general winning port. When a detection signal is input from the switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, or the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, a winning ball process is performed for setting the number of winning balls corresponding to winning according to each detection signal. (S12) is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 receives a winning information process (S13) for calculating winning information such as a winning ratio and a consecutive ratio, and displays winning information such as a winning ratio and a winning ratio calculated in the winning information processing on the display monitor 29. An information display control process (S14) is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (S15), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be executed according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (S16).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S17). . Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S18). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special prize winning unit 7 in the special variable winning ball unit 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S19). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are possible. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. An effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table by setting the state to the off state. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing winning information processing. As shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the winning information processing (S301). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when a clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (S301; Y), warning display preparation is performed (S302), and the process proceeds to S303. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (S301; N), winning information is acquired (S303). The winning information is any one of the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning port switch 26A to the fourth general winning port switch 26D. Is obtained by detecting a game ball.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (S304). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured by the RTC 106 and determined. As a result, if the current time is within business hours (S304; Y), it is determined from the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (S305).

  As a result, when the signal is not output from the door opening sensor 90 and the glass door frame 3a is closed (S305; Y), the game ball is won by the attacker more than a predetermined number per unit time. It is determined whether or not there is (S306). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls can be appropriately determined as an upper limit per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  As a result, when the game ball has not won more than the predetermined number of balls per unit time (S306; N), a prize ball number adding process for adding the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in S303 is performed. This is performed (S307). The award ball number adding process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when the warning display preparation is performed, the winning information processing is finished as it is. In the winning ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), general winning opening (heso), ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of each prize ball.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), and the special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of prize balls for each of the prize balls is calculated. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (S308). As a result, if the calculation timer has not expired (S308; N), the winning information process is terminated. If the calculation timer is up (S308; Y), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (S309).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (the prize ball total) obtained by the addition in S307 is the calculated execution number (S310). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, for example, a reference for moving numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the first storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number may be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000.

  As a result, when the number of winning balls (the winning ball total) is not the calculated execution number (S310; N), the winning information processing is terminated as it is. If the number of winning balls is the number of executions for calculation (S310; Y), the run ratio and the hand ratio are calculated (S311). Here, the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the cumulative ratio (total cumulative ratio), and the cumulative ratio (total cumulative ratio) are calculated. For this reason, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the cumulative combined ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. Thereafter, a linkage ratio / role ratio display process is performed (S312), and the winning information process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S304 that it is not within business hours (S304; N), if it is determined in S305 that the glass door frame 3a is not closed (S305; N), a game ball is sent to the attacker per unit time in S306. If it is determined that a predetermined number of balls or more have been won (S306; Y), an error display preparation is made (S313). Thereafter, the winning information processing is terminated.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the winning information display control process (S14). As shown in FIG. 17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not preparation for displaying the ratio / role ratio has been completed (S321). If it is determined that the preparation ratio / ratio display preparation process has not been completed (S321; N), it is determined whether or not an error display preparation has been completed (S322).

  As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (S322; Y), an error display is performed (S323). Error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. In addition, when performing error display, a predetermined error display may be performed on other display devices such as the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, etc. The lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  If error display is performed, it is determined whether or not warning display preparation is completed (S324). If it is determined in S322 that it is not determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (S322; N), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (S324).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (S324; Y), a warning display is performed (S325). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29 in order to indicate that a warning is being given. Or you may display by raising the brightness of the display of the display monitor 29. FIG. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays.

  In addition, when a warning is displayed, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device such as the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these. In addition, when other error display etc. are performed on the production | presentation display apparatus 5, it is suitable to display a warning so that the display of these displayed errors may not be erased.

  When the warning is displayed, the linkage ratio / ratio control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in S324 that the warning display preparation is not completed (S324; N), the linkage ratio / ratio control process is also terminated.

  If it is determined that preparation for display of the ratio / role ratio has been completed (S321; Y), a short-term ratio display is performed (S326). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term continuous ratio display (S327). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S327; N), the process returns to S326 and the short-term continuous display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S327; Y), the process proceeds to S328. Thus, the short-term continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

  Subsequently, a short-term role ratio display is performed (S328), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term role ratio display is started (S329). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S329; N), the process returns to S328 and the short-term role ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S329; Y), the process proceeds to S330. Thus, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative continuous ratio display is performed (S330), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative continuous ratio display is started (S331). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S331; N), the process returns to S330, and the cumulative connection ratio display is continued. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S331; Y), the process proceeds to S332. Thus, the cumulative continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative role ratio display is performed (S332), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative role ratio display was started (S333). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S333; N), the process returns to S332, and the cumulative ratio display is continued. Thus, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S333; Y), the continuous ratio / ratio control process is terminated.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative consecutive ratio, and the cumulative winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills, and the like provided on the game board 2.

  The display monitor 29 is disposed on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. For this reason, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 is prevented. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation holes provided in the board case 201 are not directly in front. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the heat radiating holes. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

  The main board 11 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the peripheral board such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 can display a ratio and a role ratio relating to a relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chew or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing a general winning opening. . Moreover, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term connection ratio and a cumulative connection ratio every predetermined period. For this reason, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

  Further, since the display monitor 29 displays the run ratio (short-term run ratio) and the role ratio (short-term role ratio) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, the total number of prize balls becomes 6000, etc. The numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the continuous ratio and cumulative ratio as well as the continuous ratio (short-term continuous ratio) and the winning ratio (short-term winning ratio) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6,000. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term station ratio or short-term role ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative station ratio or the cumulative role ratio. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 accommodated in the caulked board case 201. For this reason, it can contribute to prevention of fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 29.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a detection unit that detects and detects fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. Injustice here includes, for example, counting the number of winning balls outside of business hours, counting the number of winning balls while the glass door frame 3a is open, and winning a gaming ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The pachinko gaming machine 1 operates within the business hours of the amusement hall, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays a game with the door frame closed, and the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

  Further, during the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball cannot be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, game balls are fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. For this reason, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls per minute is approximately 100. Therefore, for example, when a winning of 100 gaming balls per minute or more than 20 gaming balls per 12 seconds is detected, the probability of fraud is extremely high.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 3a is not closed, when the game ball is won by the attacker more than a predetermined number per unit time The addition of the number of balls is eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the tampering of the linkage ratio, role ratio information, and the like due to these frauds. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is deleted. . For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from becoming insufficient in capacity.

  Further, the ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity. Further, it is possible to increase the data that remains without being erased.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, a lack of ring buffer capacity can be prevented.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity and to calculate the connection ratio and the role ratio with a large amount of data.

  When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. . In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described. However, in the storage area for storing data other than the ring buffer, for example, the total accumulation, a part or all of the data is similarly deleted. May be.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the data of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative consecutive ratio, and the cumulative winning ratio are displayed every 30 seconds. For this reason, each data can be compared easily. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, cumulative combined ratio, and cumulative combined ratio data, or only a part of these data.

  In addition, in displaying each data of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the cumulative combined ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, the short-term link ratio is displayed in red, and other data is displayed in green. For this reason, it can be recognized that new data is displayed from the short-term link ratio.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation when the clear switch is operated. The clear switch is an emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the role ratio. When this switch is operated, the data of the connection ratio and role ratio can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, fraud such as data tampering can be suppressed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main-side error process (S15). In the main-side error processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not an abnormality notification timer indicating that abnormality notification is being executed for a predetermined period on the presentation control board 12 side is in operation (S401).

  If the abnormality notification timer is not operating (S401; N), the process proceeds to S402. If the abnormality notification timer is in operation (S401; Y), the process proceeds to S420, the abnormality notification timer is decremented by 1, and whether or not the abnormality notification timer after the subtraction is up is determined. Determination is made (S421).

  When the abnormality notifying timer is not up (S421; N), the process proceeds to S402. On the other hand, when the abnormality notification timer is up (S421; Y), after the abnormality notification fog is cleared (S422), the process proceeds to S402.

  In S402, abnormality determination processing for determining occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the form of determining the error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and the types and number of these errors (abnormality) are those of the pachinko gaming machine 1. What is necessary is just to set suitably according to a model and specification.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each error (abnormality) 1 to 15 is set. In the abnormality determination process, it is possible to determine the occurrence of each error (abnormality) 1 to 15. .

  As shown in FIG. 19, priorities are set for these errors (abnormalities), and as a general rule, errors (abnormalities) with higher priorities are reported with priority.

  These errors include, for example, an error due to a short circuit abnormality of a switch power supply that supplies power as a device, such as a switch common short circuit error of priority “1”, detection of electromagnetic waves by the radio wave sensor 70, and magnetic force by the magnetic sensor 60. Errors that have a very high possibility of fraud such as detection of errors, detection errors of the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A, etc. There is no possibility of fraud such as a full tank error or a ball-out error, but there are errors that cause trouble in the progress of the game.

  In addition, each error has a condition for canceling the error that has occurred. For errors with relatively high priority, “Power off” is mainly the cancel condition. For an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority, the cancellation condition is that a certain time elapses or the error state is canceled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the error (abnormality) includes an error (abnormality) controlled to a predetermined game stop state and an error (abnormality) not controlled to the predetermined game stop state. An error with a relatively high priority is an error (abnormal) that is controlled to the game stop state, and an error (abnormal) with a relatively low priority is an error (abnormal) that is not controlled to the game stop state. .

  Some of these errors may be errors caused by the same sensor, depending on the detected time. For example, as an error when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80, when the abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 when the first special variable winning ball device 7A or the second special variable winning ball device 7B is operated. Is determined to be a vibration detection 1 error having a high priority of “6” and is controlled to be in a game stop state until the power is turned off, whereas the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning are If abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 during the operation of the ball device 7B, it is determined that the priority is “11”, which is a low vibration detection 2 error. The error is cancelled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, each error (abnormality) is set with a security signal output mode, and when the occurrence of each error (abnormality) is determined, each error (abnormality) is determined. The security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a manner corresponding to the above. The security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) that causes a game stop state is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) with a relatively low priority is output. The signal is output for a certain time after the error determination, or is not output. Note that the “illegal prize error” with the priority “10” is set so that a security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a certain time (for example, 4 minutes) after the power is turned on again. ing.

  As described above, in the abnormality determination process, the CPU 103 causes the magnetic sensor 60, the radio wave sensor 70, the vibration sensor 80, the door opening sensor 90, the first grand prize opening door sensor 91, and the second major prize winning opening connected to the main board 11 to be processed. Based on the detection state of the door sensor 92, the full sensor 93, the ball break sensor 94, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball of the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, etc. Each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is determined.

  Then, after executing the abnormality determination process of S402, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of abnormality has been determined in the abnormality determination process (S403), and if the occurrence of abnormality has not been determined (S403; N), Ends the error processing on the main side.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (S403; Y), whether or not an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being executed is set, that is, whether or not abnormality notification has already been performed. Is determined (S404).

  If the abnormality notification flag is not set (S404; N), the process proceeds to S410, the abnormality notification flag and the abnormality notification timer are set, and an error (abnormality) for starting notification is stored. The process proceeds to S411.

  For example, if an error (abnormality) for starting notification is a vibration detection 2 error, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set in the abnormality notification timer, and the error (abnormality) for starting notification is a start port. If there is a 2 abnormal winning error, a timer value corresponding to 300 seconds is set. However, when the error (abnormality) for starting notification is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, “0” is set in the abnormality notification timer. Thereby, in S401, when it is determined that the abnormality notification timer is not in operation, the set abnormality notification flag is set until the power is turned off. That is, for errors corresponding to these “power-off” release conditions, the error notification is continued until the power is turned off, so the abnormality notification flag is not cleared until the power is turned off. It is like that. Note that, in the case of a prize ball abnormality error determined that the number of abnormal prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game is not controlled so that an error is notified in a state where a game is possible.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set (S404; Y), the abnormality being notified is specified from the notification abnormality data stored in S410 (S405), and the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is determined. Is the same as the error (abnormality) being notified (S406).

  When the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is the same as the error (abnormality) being notified (S406; Y), the main-side error process is terminated. On the other hand, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not the same as the error (abnormality) being notified (S406; N), the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is higher than the error (abnormality) being notified. It is determined whether or not it is a priority error (abnormal) (S407). When the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) having a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being notified (S407; N), the main-side error processing is terminated. Therefore, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) having a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being notified, the step of S413 is executed and an error designation command is sent to the effect control board 12. Since it is not transmitted, the notification of the error (abnormality) is not executed, and the notification of the error (abnormality) being notified is continued.

  On the other hand, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is an error (abnormality) having a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being notified (S407; Y), a game stop state that is a predetermined state is further indicated. It is determined whether or not a game stop flag is set (S408).

  When the game stop flag is set (S408; Y), that is, when the game is stopped, the main-side error process is terminated. Therefore, in the game stop state, even if an error (abnormality) having a higher priority than the error (abnormality) being notified is determined in S402, the step of S413 or the step of S414 may be executed. Since no new error designation command is transmitted to the production control board 12, the notification of the error (abnormality) being notified continues and the output of the security signal being output changes ( (ON / OFF of the signal).

  On the other hand, when the game stop flag is not set (S408; N), that is, when it is not the game stop state, the process proceeds to S409, the abnormality notification timer is reset, and an error during notification (abnormal) Is updated and stored. In addition, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is different from the error (abnormality) being notified is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, the abnormality is similar to the case of S410 described above. By setting “0” in the notification timer, the abnormality notification flag is set until the power is turned off.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the error (abnormality) different from the error being reported (abnormality) determined in S402 is an error corresponding to the game stop (S411), and if it is not an error corresponding to the game stop ( In S411; N), the process proceeds to S413 without going through S412. If it is an error corresponding to a game stop (S411; Y), the launch control board is set to stop firing, the game ball from the hitting ball launcher is disabled, and the game stop flag is set. Then (S412), the process proceeds to S413.

  In S413, an error designation command for designating the occurrence of an error (abnormality) different from the error being reported (abnormality) determined in S402 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12, and then the error (abnormality) is set. ) Is set to output a security signal in the output mode corresponding to (), and the main-side error processing is terminated. By setting the security signal to be output in S414, the security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to an external device such as a hall computer in the information output process (S16).

  The error designation command set to be transmitted in S413 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in S20. In the effect control board 12, an error notification corresponding to an error (abnormality) specified by the transmitted error designation command is executed by executing an error notification process (see FIG. 30) described later. The

  As described above, the main-side error process described above is executed on the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the error notification process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed on the effect control board 12, thereby As shown in FIG. 20, the error notification execution mode differs depending on whether or not the game state is a predetermined game stop state.

  Specifically, for example, when the occurrence of the vibration detection 2 error shown in FIG. 19 is first determined in a gameable state, the occurrence of the vibration detection 2 error is as shown in FIG. In addition, a pop-up window of “E-54 vibration error” corresponding to the vibration detection 2 error is notified by being displayed on the effect display device 5 for a predetermined time of 60 seconds.

  When the occurrence of a prize ball abnormality error is determined during the notification of the vibration detection 2 error, the priority of the prize ball abnormality error is “7”, and the priority of the vibration detection 2 error being executed. Therefore, in place of the pop-up window of “E-54 vibration error” that notifies the currently executed vibration detection 2 error, a prize ball abnormality error notification, specifically, FIG. As shown in A), a pop-up window including the message “Please call a staff member! E-33 Prize ball abnormality error Please turn on the power again” is displayed to notify the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality error. However, when this award ball abnormality error occurs, the game is not controlled to be stopped, and a game-ready state is maintained.

  Then, during the notification of the prize ball abnormality error, for example, when the occurrence of a “magnet error” that is an error having a higher priority than the prize ball abnormality error is determined, as shown in FIG. The entire display of the effect display device 5 is displayed in black, which indicates that the game is stopped, and the effect display device 5 indicates “Please call the suspender! E-02 Magnet error. "Please" "is displayed in white letters, so that the occurrence of" magnet error "is informed, and the error (abnormality) that has caused the game to stop is informed of a magnet error.

  Then, after entering the game stop state in this way, it is determined that, for example, the occurrence of a “radio wave error”, which is an error having a higher priority than the “magnet error” that has been triggered by the game stop state, is determined. In this case, as described above, even if the occurrence of the “radio wave error” is determined, the game stop flag is set so that the error designation command corresponding to the determination of the “radio wave error” is not transmitted. As shown in FIG. 21B, the notification of “radio error” is not executed, and the notification of “magnet error” that triggered the control to the game stop state is continued. It is no longer possible to determine what kind of error is triggered by the state, and it is suitable for fraud using a magnet, which is an error triggered by the game stop state. It is possible to prevent the Do corresponding becomes impossible.

  In addition, when it is determined that an occurrence of a “radio wave error”, for example, an error having a higher priority than a “magnet error” that has been triggered by the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, the step S414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the “radio wave error” determined to be generated is limited, so the security signal corresponding to the “magnet error” being output is limited. Will not change (signal ON / OFF), and it will be difficult to confirm the error (abnormality) that triggered these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a hall computer. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 9 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S21). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S31 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  In the start winning process of S21, it is determined whether or not there has been a first start prize or a second start prize by the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B. Random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type, random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A If it is the second start winning prize, it is stored at the highest level, and stored at the highest level of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal process, the variation display result derives whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the variation display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before it is displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B). Either the small hit symbol or the off symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from any of a plurality of variations using numerical data indicating a variation pattern determination random value MR3 based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. This includes the process of determining whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal process in S22 and the variation pattern setting process in S23, a variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and use the special symbol or effect symbol. The process of determining the variable display mode is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is decremented or incremented by 1, Regardless of whether it is a special game using the first special graphic in the special symbol display 4A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B, it is passed by a common timer. Time measurements are taken. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S24 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 4A or the second special symbol display unit 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, etc., a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the first big winning opening to the open state Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first big winning opening is opened is set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “big hit A”, “big hit B”, or “big hit C”. Also good. As an example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the upper limit of the period during which the first grand prize opening is in the open state is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening number of the first big prize opening that is the upper limit number of times to execute the round “Big hit A” is set to “5 times”, “Big hit B” is set to “10 times”, and “Big hit C” is set to “15 times”. That's fine. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the first big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. The process includes determining whether or not it is time to return the first big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the first grand prize winning port is returned to the closed state, processing for stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the first grand prize winning door 701 is executed, and then the value of the special process flag is “6”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process of S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 A process of waiting until time elapses and a process of performing various settings (setting of a time reduction flag) for starting time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Specifically, in the jackpot end process, the type of jackpot executed is specified. If the identified big hit type is “big hit A”, the special process flag value is updated to “0” without setting the hourly flag. When the identified big hit type is “big hit B”, the hourly flag is set and the initial count value (for example, “20”) corresponding to “hit B” is set in the hourly number counter and the special figure process flag is set. Update the value to “0”. If the specified big hit type is “hit C”, the special time process is set by setting the hour / hour flag and the count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to “hit C”. The flag value is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This small-hitting pre-processing is a setting for starting the execution of the round in the small-hit gaming state and opening the second big winning opening based on the fact that the change display result is “small-hit” The processing that performs is included. At this time, for example, based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the second big prize opening is opened is set to “1 second”, and the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times the second big prize opening is opened to “1”, it is only necessary to set the small hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”.

  In this embodiment, in the small hit state, the number of times of opening the second big prize opening is set to “1”, and the upper limit of the period during which the second big prize opening is opened is set to “1 second”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of opening the second big prize opening in the small hit state may be two or more times, and the second big prize opening is made open. The upper limit of the period may be a period other than “1 second” as long as the game ball can win the second grand prize opening.

  The small hit releasing process of S30 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the second big prize opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 24A, and the like. And a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the second big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the second grand prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 83 for the second big prize opening door 711, the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. Is updated.

  The small hit end process of S31 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit end processing corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for informing the end of the big hit gaming state by the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Processing that waits until the waiting time elapses is included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (S141). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the process of S141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in S141 (S141; N), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data corresponding to the hold number “1”. Then, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (S142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of S142, the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value are decremented by one and updated, thereby causing the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number to be decremented by one. In addition, the data in the second special figure storage unit 151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B are stored. The pending data shown is shifted up by one entry (S143).

  Thereafter, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “2” (S144), and then the process proceeds to S149.

  On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in S141 (S141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (S145). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the process of S145, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Good. In this way, the process of S145 is executed when it is determined in S141 that the second special figure hold memory number is “0”, and whether or not the first special figure hold memory number is “0”. Determine whether. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure. For example, the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening may be used. The execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be able to decide.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in S145 (S145; N), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the reservation data corresponding to the reservation number “1”. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (S146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing in S146, the first special figure reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are decremented by one by updating the first special figure reserved memory count count value or the total reserved memory count count value by one. In addition, the data in the first special figure storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A are stored. The pending data shown is shifted up by one entry (S147).

  Thereafter, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “1” (S148), and then the process proceeds to S149.

  FIG. 6A shows a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variation display result of the special symbol, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “off” in S149. Select and set the display result judgment table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “out” (S150).

  After the special figure display result is determined in S150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (S151). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S152). At this time, the big hit type determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the big hit types as a plurality of types (S153). At this time, if the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is “1”, the CPU 103 selects and sets the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. When the value of the buffer is “2”, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6C may be selected and set. By referring to the big hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “big hit A” and “big hit B” in the big hit type determination table. Then, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each big hit type of “big hit C” is matched, it is determined which of the multiple types is the big hit type (S154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is either a time-short state in which time-only control (short-time control) is performed or a normal state in which time-shortening control is not performed. Whether the game state is to be controlled is determined before the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the determined jackpot type is set. Store and proceed to S156. For example, if the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “big hit B” may be “1”, and “big hit C” may be “2”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S151 that it is not “big hit” (S151; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (S151a). When it is determined that it is “small hit” (S151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S151a). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 6D) is selected and set as a use table for determining the small hit type as one of a plurality of types (S151c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is stored in the small hit type determination table as “small hit A”, “ Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each of the small hit types of “small hit B” is matched, it is determined which of the plural types is the small hit type (S151d).

  Corresponding to the small hit type determined in this way, for example, by setting a small hit type buffer value which is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S151e) The small hit type is stored and the process proceeds to S156. As an example, if the small hit type is “small hit A”, the small hit type buffer value may be “0”, and if “small hit B”, it may be “1”.

  In S156, whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is set), the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, and further to the small hit gaming state A definite special symbol is set in accordance with a predetermined result of whether or not to control (whether or not a small hit flag is set). As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol “-” that becomes a loss symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol in response to a pre-determined result indicating that the special symbol display result is “miss”. If it is determined in S151 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in S154. One of the special symbols indicating numbers is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit A”. Further, a special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit B”. The special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit C”. In addition, a special symbol indicating the symbol “2”, which is a small hit symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol corresponding to a predetermined result indicating that the special symbol display result is “small bonus”.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S157), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  In S145, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (S145; Y), after a predetermined demonstration display setting is made (S158), the special symbol normal The process ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. Control for deriving and displaying symbols is performed (S181). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is In the case of “2” indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 4B is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 is performed (S182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183). If the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S189a.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the hourly flag if the hourly flag is set (S184), and the big hit stored in the effect control board 12 is cleared. Depending on the type, settings are made to transmit a hit start 1 designation command (big hit A), a hit start 2 designation command (big hit B), and a hit start 3 designation command (big hit C) (S185). The hit start designation command set in S185 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which, for example, the effect display device 5 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (S187). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times for big hit A, 10 times for big hit B, 15 times for big hit C) is set in the big prize opening number counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (S26) (S189), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S189a, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (S189a). If the small hit flag is not set (S189a; Y), the process proceeds to S190. On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set (S189a; Y), the CPU 103 causes the effect control board 12 to receive a hit start 4 designation command (small hit A) according to the stored small hit type. Setting for transmitting the start 5 designation command (small hit B) is performed (S189b). The hit start designation command set in S189b is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 5 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (S189c). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, once in the case of a small hit) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S189d). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S26) (S189e), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S196.

  On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S190; N), that is, in the high base state (time reduction state) in which the time reduction number remains, the value of the time reduction counter is set to −1. (S191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is “0” (S193). If it is not “0” (S193; N), the process proceeds to S196, and the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. ”(S193; Y), in order to end the time reduction control, after clearing the time reduction flag (S194), the game state corresponding to the state of setting the time reduction flag (specifically, the low base state (normally After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to (state)) (S195), the process proceeds to S196. In S196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S29 of FIG. 22 as pre-start processing for small hits. In the small hit pre-start process, the CPU 103 first decrements the small hit display time timer (S201), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has expired (S202). If the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S202; N), the pre-opening process for the small hit display is terminated, whereas if the small hit display time timer has expired (S202; Y), the second big prize is won. A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set in an opening time timer for opening the mouth (S203). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the small hit releasing process (S30) (S204), and the small hit pre-release process is terminated.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S30 of FIG. 22 as the small hit release process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the release time timer by −1 ( S211). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has expired (S212).

  If the opening time timer has timed out (S212; Y), the process proceeds to S230. If the opening time timer has not timed out (S212; N), whether or not it is the opening timing of the second big prize opening. Is determined (S213). When it is the opening timing of the second big prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the second big prize opening to be opened by driving the solenoid 83 for the second big prize opening door 711 (S214). Then, transmission setting of the special winning opening opening designation command corresponding to the round is performed (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. It should be noted that the special winning opening open designation command set for transmission in S215 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the opening timing of the second big prize opening (S213; N), the process proceeds to S216 without going through S214 and S215.

  In S216, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the second big prize opening (S216). When it is the closing timing of the second big prize opening (S216; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second big prize opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 83 for the second big prize opening door 711 (S217). . Then, transmission setting of a designation command after opening the special winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. It should be noted that the special winning opening open designation command that has been set for transmission in S218 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second big prize opening (S216; N), the process proceeds to S223 without going through S217 and S218.

  In S223, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223). When the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S223; N), the small hit releasing process is terminated, and when the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223; Y), the third count switch 24B is already in the third state. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 24B is turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch is set (S224). When the V winning flag is set (S224; Y), the small hit release process is terminated, and when the V winning flag is not set (S224; N), the V winning flag is set (S225). .

  Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (S227). The V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Further, if the second grand prize opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second big prize opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 83 for the second big prize opening door 711 (S228), and the opening time. The timer is cleared (S229).

  In S230, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “9” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (S31) (S230), and ends the small hit releasing process.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S31 of FIG. 22 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit end display timer is operating. Is determined (S231). If the small hit end display timer is not in operation (S231; N), the small hit flag is cleared (S232), and transmission setting of a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit is performed on the effect control board 12 (S233). ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (S234), and the small hit end processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is operating (S231; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S235). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small hit end display timer has expired (S236). When the small hit end display time has not elapsed (S236; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237). When the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S237; N), the small hit end processing is terminated, and when the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237; Y), the third count is already completed. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the switch 24B is turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch is set (S238). If the V winning flag is set (S238; Y), the small hit end processing is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set (S238; N), the V winning flag is set (S239).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (S241), and ends the small hit end process. The V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed in S236 (S236; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S242). When the V winning flag gusset is set (S242; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (S243, S244). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type from “big hit D” and “big hit E” based on the small hit type in which the V winning has occurred (S246). As shown in FIG. 6 (D), when the small hit type in which the V winning has occurred is “small hit A”, the big hit type is determined to be “big hit D” and the V winning type is shown in FIG. If the small hit type with the occurrence of “small hit B” is determined, the big hit type is determined as “big hit E”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S247), the determined jackpot type is set. Store and proceed to S248. As an example, if the big hit type is “big hit D”, the big hit type buffer value may be “3”, and if “big hit E”, it may be “4”.

  After execution of S247, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (S26) (S248), and ends the small hit end processing.

  That is, not only during the small hit game but also during the period until the small hit end display time after the small hit game ends, the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B, so the small hit game ends. Even if a game ball wins the second big winning opening immediately before, the big hit game is executed after the small hit end processing is completed by passing the third ball through the third count switch 24B. Yes.

  If the V winning flag is not set in S242 (S242; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S22) ( S249), the small hit end processing is ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random numbers such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56).

  And after performing the error alerting | reporting process (S57) shown in FIG. 30, it transfers to S52.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the hold storage display in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U of the effect display device 5 according to the storage contents of the effect control buffer setting unit. The hold display update process for updating to the display is executed (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S82 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received in the command analysis process. If the change pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S74).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S74): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

  Production symbol variation processing (S75): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S76): Based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77), the small hit display process (S80), or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Jackpot display process (S77): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a jackpot. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S78).

  Big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S79).

  Big hit end effect process (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Small hit display process (S80): After the variation time is over, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game processing (S81).

  Small hit game processing (S81): Control during the small hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S82).

  Small hit end effect process (S82): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73) or the jackpot display process (S77).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the error notification process (S57). In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the error notification timer is operating (S501).

  If the error notification timer is not operating, that is, if error notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to S502.

  On the other hand, when the error notification timer is operating, that is, when error notification is being executed, the error notification timer is decremented by -1 (S510), and the error notification timer after the subtraction is increased. It is determined whether or not (S511).

  If the error notification timer is not up (S511; N), the process proceeds to S502 without going through S512 and S513.

  On the other hand, if the error notification timer has expired (S511; Y), the error notification flag is cleared (S512), the error notification being executed is terminated (S513), and the process proceeds to S502.

  In S502, it is determined whether an error designation command reception flag is set. The error designation command reception flag is set in the command analysis process when the command transmitted from the main board 11 is identified in the command analysis process (S54) described above as an error designation command.

  When the error designation command reception flag is not set (S502; N), the error notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if the error designation command reception flag is set (S502; Y), the set error designation command reception flag is cleared (S503), and the error designation command stored in the error designation command storage area is cleared. The error type is specified from (specifically, the value of EXT) (S504), the notification mode set for the specified error type, specifically, the content displayed on the effect display device 5, and the game effect The lighting mode of the lamp 9 and the sound to be output are specified (S505), and error notification is started in the specified notification mode (S506).

  Next, the error type identified in S504 is an error having a notification period, for example, vibration detection 2 error in which 60 seconds is set as the release period (notification period), or 300 seconds is set as the release period (notification period). It is determined whether or not the start port 2 abnormal winning error is.

  When the error type is an error with a notification period (S507; Y), the error notification flag and a value corresponding to the notification period are set in the error notification timer and the timer count of the error notification timer is started. Then, the error notification process ends. As a result, the error notification started in S506 ends when the error notification timer expires.

  On the other hand, if the error type is not an error with a notification period (S507; N), only the error notification flag is set, and the error notification process is terminated without starting the timer count of the error notification timer. Thus, since the error notification timer is not determined to be operating in S501 described above, the notification of the error started in S506 is continued until the next error designation command is received.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an error (abnormality) is newly determined as the predetermined state in the game stop state based on an error (abnormality) determination, the determined error (abnormality) is determined. Even if the priority of the error is higher than the priority of the error (abnormality) being notified, the error (abnormality) that triggered the game stop state becomes difficult to confirm because the previous error (abnormality) notification is continued. It is possible to prevent an appropriate response from being disabled.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 19, a plurality of errors (abnormalities) are set as errors (abnormalities) controlled in the game stop state. The occurrence of an abnormality can be determined.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko game is provided with the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B that is a big hit that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes (enters) the third count switch 24B that is a specific area. In the machine 1, when an abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 when the second large prize opening door 711 of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B is opened, the vibration detection 1 having a high priority of “6” is detected. Since it is determined that there is an error and the game is controlled to be stopped, it is possible to determine that an error (abnormality) occurs when the game ball passes (enters) the third count switch 24B by vibration.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the above-described main-side error processing will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration other than the main-side error processing is the same as that in the above-described embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the above-described embodiment, the occurrence of an error (abnormality) is determined even in the game stop state which is a predetermined state, but by limiting the notification of the occurrence of the determined error (abnormality) In this case, the error (abnormality) that triggered the game stop state, which is a predetermined state, is prevented from being difficult to confirm. By limiting the generation of a new error (abnormality) from being determined by not executing the main-side error processing itself including the abnormality determination process that determines the occurrence of an error (abnormality) The error (abnormality) that triggered the game stop state that is a predetermined state is prevented from being difficult to confirm.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, in the first step of the main side error processing, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is set, and the game stop flag is set (S400; Y). In this case, the main-side error process is terminated, and if the game stop flag is not set (S400; N), the processes after S401 may be executed.

  Since the processing after S401 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment except for the processing of step S408, description thereof is omitted here.

  As described above, according to the above-described modification 1, when the game is in the predetermined state, the determination of a new error (abnormality) is limited regardless of the priority, so that the game in the predetermined state It is possible to prevent an abnormality that has been triggered by the stop state from becoming difficult to confirm.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the error notification process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration other than the error notification process is the same as that of the above-described embodiment except for the main-side error process. However, it is assumed that the data for specifying the priority of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is stored so as to be readable by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the above-described embodiment, the priority of the error (abnormality) newly determined in the main-side error processing is specified, and the specified priority is higher than the error (abnormality) being notified. By determining whether or not the priority is higher than the error (abnormality) being notified, the error designation command is transmitted, so that the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) side has the priority. Although a mode in which determination by identification or comparison is not performed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main-side error processing in the above-described embodiment, by not executing step S407, the priority is set. Regardless of the occurrence of an error (abnormality), the transmission of the error designation command is determined and the error shown in FIG. By executing the knowledge processing, the performance control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) side, may be a determination due newly priority identification and comparison of the determined error (abnormality).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 32, following the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not an error notification flag is set, that is, whether or not an error notification is being performed (S504a). If it is not set (S504a; N), the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, if the error notification flag is set (S504a; Y), the process proceeds to S504b, and the error type specified in S504 is prioritized. It is further determined whether or not the error is higher than the priority of the error type being notified, and if not higher than the priority of the error type being notified (S504b; N), the error notification process is terminated. Thus, while continuing the error notification that has already been executed, if the error type is higher than the priority of the error type being notified (S504b; N), after the error notification being executed is terminated (S 04c), it proceeds to S505, an error notification of the identified error type at S504, it may be started instead of the error notification in progress.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the embodiment and the modified example, the game stop state, which is a predetermined state, is disabled by restricting the launch of the game ball, and the main board 11 has a game control timer similar to that when the game is possible. By executing interrupt processing, it is possible to detect switches, pay out prize balls, calculate and display prize information, send presentation control commands, etc., for example, magnet sensors, radio wave sensors, etc. Even if the game is stopped by mistake due to malfunction or noise detection, etc., the awarding of prize balls will be executed, so there will be inconvenience even if the game is stopped by mistake. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, so that the game control timer interrupt processing is hardly executed to detect a switch or award. Spherical Ya brewed, calculation and display of the winning information, may state impossible to transmit such a performance control command.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example, the game stop state is exemplified as the predetermined state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined state is different from the game stop state, for example, a security signal. If a security signal is output or an error (abnormality) is being notified, a new security signal is output. Notification of new errors (abnormalities) and determination of new errors (abnormalities) may be restricted, and these predetermined states may not be caused by errors (abnormalities), for example, states that are outside business hours Such as a state that is a predetermined period before closing time, or a state that satisfies a temporal condition, or a state that satisfies a predetermined condition related to a game (for example, the base is a design value) State or the lower limit value exceeds the upper limit of the reference range may be in a state) below.

  In addition, the predetermined state is, for example, provided with a plurality of actors (movable bodies) that are provided so as to be displaceable at an operation position away from the origin position and that may collide when operating at the same time by overlapping at least part of the operation range. In an initialization process for sequentially initializing each accessory (movable body) in the case of including an origin sensor (detection means) capable of detecting that each accessory (movable body) is located at the origin position In the return-to-origin operation of positioning one accessory (movable body) at the origin position, the origin sensor cannot detect the accessory (movable body) and cannot place the accessory (movable body) at the origin position. Even if there is something that restricts the operation of a plurality of actors (movable bodies) that overlap at least a part of the operation range while notifying that the accessory (movable body) is abnormal Good. In this case, the operation of a plurality of actors (movable bodies) is restricted, so that other actors (movable bodies) other than one actor (movable body) are returned to the origin position. Error determination and error notification associated therewith are not performed, and it can be prevented that it becomes impossible to confirm which of the actors (movable bodies) has been restricted by the actions of multiple actors (movable bodies). It is possible to prevent an increase in processing load due to unnecessary abnormality determination. That is, for each accessory (movable body), it is determined as an origin return error (abnormal) that it is not detected by the origin sensor in the origin return operation, and an origin return error (abnormal) is detected for one accessory (movable body). If it is determined, it is only necessary not to perform the determination and notification of the origin return error (abnormality) for the other accessory (movable body). Further, when a security signal is output in accordance with an operation abnormality of one accessory (movable body), the security signal may not be output for the other accessory (movable body).

  Moreover, in the said Example and the said modification, although the role ratio and the connection ratio were only calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, the form which does not determine the abnormality about a role ratio or a connection ratio was illustrated. It is not limited, and it is judged as abnormal when the duty ratio exceeds a predetermined duty ratio prescribed value (for example, 70%) or when the linkage ratio exceeds the prescribed ratio value (for example, 60%). An abnormality notification may be made. Further, different types of errors may be determined or notified depending on the degree of the role ratio deviating from the specified ratio, or the degree of the combination ratio deviating from the specified ratio. In this case, the notification priority may be set according to the degree that the role ratio deviates from the specified ratio, or the degree that the combination ratio deviates from the specified ratio.

  In addition, when determining an abnormality in the role ratio or the continuous ratio, if a notification priority as shown in FIG. 19 is set in advance for these abnormalities, the role ratio or the continuous ratio is based on the main-side error process shown in FIG. It is possible to report an abnormality regarding the ratio.

  In addition, when a plurality of types of errors are set for these role ratios and connection ratios, a process of setting a game stop state or outputting a security signal may be performed for an error having a high priority.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example, the priority of each error (abnormality) is set in advance as shown in FIG. 19, and the form in which the game hall cannot be changed as appropriate is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a priority changing unit that can change the priority of each error (abnormality) or the like appropriately by the game hall may be provided.

  In the embodiment and the modified example, the gaming machine includes the second special variable winning ball device 7B that is released by a small hit, and the second special variable winning ball device 7B is a specific area. The pachinko gaming machine 1 that is a big hit that is advantageous to the player by passing (entering) the game ball through the 3 count switch 24B is illustrated, but is not limited to this, and the second special variable winning ball device 7B. May be provided with only the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A.

  Moreover, although the said Example and the said modification are equipped with the display monitor 29 which can display winning information, such as a ratio and a connection ratio, and have illustrated the form which performs winning information processing and winning information display control processing, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 29 may not be provided, and the winning information process or the winning information display control process may not be executed.

  Moreover, in the said Example and the said modification, although the form which provided the display monitor 29 in the main board | substrate 11 was illustrated, it is not limited to this, These display monitors 29 are board | substrates other than the main board | substrate 11. For example, it may be provided on the payout board, the power supply board, the relay board 15, the effect control board 12, or the like.

  In the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be circulated inside the gaming machine. The number of balls lent out in response to a loan request from a player and the number of prize balls given in response to a prize is added, while the number of game balls used in a game is subtracted and stored. It can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the variation display result is a small hit, the game ball passes the third count switch 24B to extract the big hit type determination random value MR2, and the extracted big hit type determination random Although the example of determining the jackpot type in the jackpot game after the end of the small hit game by using the numerical value MR2 and the V winning jackpot type determination table is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Small hitting type), and the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hitting game of each small hitting type or until the predetermined period elapses from the end of the small hitting game. The jackpot type in the jackpot game after the game may end may be determined.

  Specifically, for example, “small hit A”, “small hit B”, and “small hit C” are provided as small hit types, and during a small hit game of “small hit A” or from the end of the small hit game for a predetermined period of time. If the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B until the lapse of time, the big hit type of the big hit game after the end of the small hit game is determined as “big hit A”, and the “small hit B” small hit game is in progress If the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B from the end of the small hit game until the predetermined period elapses, the big hit type of the big hit game after the end of the small hit game is determined as “big hit B”. If the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of "C" or between the end of the small hit game and the lapse of a predetermined period, the big hit type of the big hit game after the end of the small hit game is set to "Big hit" C ”may be determined.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) capable of displaying a change and playing a game,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining the occurrence of an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes an abnormality determination process for determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. )When,
When an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, if the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being reported, the notification is terminated, and the determined abnormality is notified Abnormality notification means (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, when an error having a higher priority than the error being notified is determined, if the game stop flag is not set, an error of a high priority error In the error notification process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 by transmitting the designated command to the effect control board 12, the error notification of the error having the high priority is already executed. To be executed instead of)
Based on the abnormality being determined by the abnormality determining means, the state control means for controlling the state corresponding to the determined abnormality (for example, the CPU 103 prohibits the release of the game ball in S411 and sets the game stopped state. Part)
Suggestion display execution means (for example, a meter MT as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58) capable of executing an suggestion display that suggests an expectation that is advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of stages. Production control CPU90120, etc.)
Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (meter effect) that can change the display mode of the suggestion display (for example, as shown in FIGS. , An effect that changes the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit value (level 4 (MAX)), an effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit value of the meter, the type and number of items Effect control CPU90120, etc. capable of executing an effect of changing the character (size, color, number, etc.), an effect of increasing or decreasing the number, etc.)
The suggestion display that is being executed during the variable display is once erased in response to the start of the execution of a special effect (for example, a normal reach effect or reach advancement effect), and then replayed according to the execution of the change effect. Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the meter MT and the like are once erased at the start of the execution of reach development propriety effect, and then the movable effect member 9060 operates. An effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing effects such as redisplaying the meter MT according to the development of super reach, and the like.
With
The abnormality notification means is when a new event corresponding to the abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state (for example, a game stop state in which a game stop flag is set). In this case, the notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state is continued regardless of the priority of the abnormality (for example, in S407 of the main-side error process, an error having a higher priority than the error being notified is detected). If the game stop flag is set when the determination is made, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 does not transmit the error designation command of the error with high priority to the effect control board 12. (The part that continues to notify the error that is already running without executing the error notification of the high priority error)
A gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent an event that has been triggered by the predetermined state from being difficult to confirm. Further, in the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the suggestion display from interfering with the special effect.

  In the above gaming machine, if an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means while the suggestion display is being performed during the variable display, the suggestion display may be deleted from the point of giving priority to the notification of the abnormality, or continued as it is Then, the suggestion display may be displayed. When the suggestion display is continuously displayed as it is, the display regarding abnormality notification may be displayed more conspicuously than the suggestion display from the point of giving priority to abnormality notification. For example, the display related to the notification of abnormality is displayed overlapping with the suggestion display, and the display related to the notification of abnormality is preferentially displayed in the overlapping portion, or the display related to notification of abnormality is larger than the suggestion display. Examples include the displayed form.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, when the suggestion display is once erased in response to the execution of the special effect during the variable display, when the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, the suggestion is given to the point that priority is given to the notification of the abnormality. The display may not be displayed again, and the suggestion display may be displayed again. When the suggestion display is redisplayed, the suggestion display may be displayed so as not to be conspicuous as compared with the display related to the notification of abnormality because priority is given to abnormality notification.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can suppress the impediment display from interfering with special effects,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) capable of performing a variable display,
Suggestion display execution means (for example, a meter MT as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58) capable of executing an suggestion display that suggests an expectation that is advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of stages. Production control CPU90120, etc.)
Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (meter effect) that can change the display mode of the suggestion display (for example, as shown in FIGS. , An effect that changes the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit value (level 4 (MAX)), an effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit value of the meter, the type and number of items Effect control CPU90120, etc. capable of executing an effect of changing the character (size, color, number, etc.), an effect of increasing or decreasing the number, etc.)
The suggestion display that is being executed during the variable display is once erased in response to the start of the execution of a special effect (for example, a normal reach effect or reach advancement effect), and then replayed according to the execution of the change effect. Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the meter MT and the like are once erased at the start of the execution of reach development propriety effect, and then the movable effect member 9060 operates. And an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing an effect of redisplaying the meter MT or the like in accordance with the development of super reach. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, other exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 33 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 902. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and the like. A special symbol which is the type of identification information is displayed in a variable manner. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special special symbol display device 904B can change a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. indicate.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off is different. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Say.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 capable of executing variable display of decorative symbols (also referred to as variable display) is provided. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The display area of the image display device 905 corresponds to variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special game. Thus, in the decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. Then, in response to the start of one of the fluctuations of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. , “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R start changing the decorative symbols. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. It should be noted that, for example, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols, the display of identification information such as decorative symbols is stopped and variable display is terminated. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special game is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed or the pachinko gaming machine 901 has When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

  For example, when the start condition for the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes through the first start prize opening, If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one, and the first special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. Also, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is established due to the occurrence of the second start prize that the game ball passes through the second start prize opening, If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by 1, and the second special figure is displayed. Execution of the special figure game used is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. 1 is subtracted from the number stored in the second special figure hold.

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. The term “special figure pending storage number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and the total pending memory number, and particularly refers to a part thereof. It may happen.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 33, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special special symbol display device 904B, together with the start winning memory display area 905H, the first special symbol display unit 904B for displaying the special figure reserved memory number in an identifiable manner. A hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B includes, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, respectively. .

  A movable effect member 9060 is provided in the vicinity of the predetermined edge in the display area of the image display device 905. The movable effect member 9060 is tilted toward the left side of FIG. 33 with the lower end portion as a fulcrum on the image display device 905 side by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 9061 shown in FIG. 34, and the upper end portion in the image display device 905. A production model that advances to the front of the display area is configured. That is, the movable effect member 9060 can be changed between a non-tilting state extending in the vertical direction and the above-described tilting state by rotational driving of the movable effect member motor 9061 shown in FIG.

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. An ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B includes an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. And forming a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball enters the second start winning opening. It becomes a state. It should be noted that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B can enter the second start winning opening even when in the closed state, but has a lower possibility of entering the gaming ball than in the open state. You may comprise as follows. In this way, the game area is provided with the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the first special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, if a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the second start The condition is met.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 34, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and prevents the game ball from passing through the big winning opening. . On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the special winning opening door solenoid 9082 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening and the game ball easily passes through the large winning opening. To do. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass and advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, for example, when the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 907 is closed or partly closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass the gaming ball through the special prize opening to obtain a prize ball. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special special symbol display device 904B. The normal symbol as information is displayed in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called “general game”. Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered one of the general winning holes is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. A dish is provided. A lower plate is provided below the gaming machine frame 903 so that excess balls overflowing from the upper plate can be discharged out of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Various types of control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 34 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each of the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform variable display of the first special diagram and the second special diagram. There is also a function for controlling variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling, variable control of normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 9020 by controlling on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display device 9020, etc. I have.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9082 for the special prize opening door.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. , And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays all or part of the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, and the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a section.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012, game effect lamps 909, decoration LEDs, etc. A lamp driver circuit for performing on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 34, wiring for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch, and a count switch 9023 is connected to the main board 9011. The various switches may have any configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a so-called “sensor”. The main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. It is sufficient that the first bit of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data is set to “0” in advance.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 90101 for storing game control programs and fixed data, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. The CPU 90103 is configured to execute a game control program to perform a control operation, the random number circuit 90104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and the I / O 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 90100 only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 90102 in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, the random number circuit 90104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to the program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 905, a random number circuit 90124 for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012. On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the effect control board 9012 is also connected to wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 9016 for driving the movable effect member motor 9061 for operating the movable effect member 9060. .

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 34 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 90120. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effects display by determining the switching timing of the effect image displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, VDP, CGROM, VRAM, LCD drive circuit, or the like may be mounted on the display control unit 90123. The VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  An I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is comprised including. For example, an output port of the I / O 90125 outputs a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014, and the like. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor provided in a predetermined hitting ball launching device based on a predetermined operation by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of a housing in a pachinko gaming machine 901 Thus, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the first start is performed due to the detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The condition is met. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the second start condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. To do. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special special symbol display device 904B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Be started. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the closed state as the second state, it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 34, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 9020 is established. Thereafter, the general symbol display device 9020 starts the general symbol game on the basis of the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, for example, that the previous general symbol game has ended, is established. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the opening control is performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted, and the predetermined time is reached. Closing control is performed to return to the vertical position when the time has elapsed.

  When a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started, Whether or not to make the variable symbol display result of the special symbol a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the effect control microcomputer 100 of the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special special symbol display device 904B, “left”, “middle”, “right” arranged in the display area of the image display device 905 In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, variable display of decorative symbols different from the special symbols is performed.

  The special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B are determined to be a variable symbol display result. When the special symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 905 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big jackpot”, and the bonus game state is controlled as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. As a special symbol variable display result, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed, and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. Moreover, the special symbol of the lighting pattern having a specific meaning as a number or a symbol is not limited to the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. It is good.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated, a round game in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “Changing”. When the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to be the first state advantageous to the player is relatively long as a round game in the big win game state. A regular round of time is performed. As a round game in the big hit game state, a big hit type in which a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state is relatively short may be executed. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, based on the fact that a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, the probability display may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as a predetermined number of variable displays is executed or the next big hit gaming state is started. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-saving state is controlled to continue until either one of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied first, between the fact that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed and the next big hit gaming state has been started. . As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probability change”, after the big hit game state is ended, the game state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probability changing state or the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is changed between the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening compared to the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 9020 can control the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of each normal symbol game is “per normal symbol”. The tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” is greater than that in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B may be changed to the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode by the control for increasing the length and the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state. Any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first state and the second state in an advantageous change manner is referred to as high opening control. By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained.

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have valuable values that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity. That's fine. Alternatively, the game ball and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game by the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of any one of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special special symbol display device 904B, variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, the reach mode means that the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitute a part of the jackpot combination continue to fluctuate. Or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed. The display pattern in which the decorative symbols are changed in the remaining decorative symbol display areas that are not stopped, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” In the display mode, the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Corresponding to the reach mode, the variation rate of the decorative design is reduced, a character image different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, or the display mode of the background image is changed. In some cases, a presentation operation different from that before reaching the reach mode may be executed by changing the display mode of the moving image different from the decorative design or by changing the display mode of the decorative design. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the variable display mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect display. The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, etc. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the above.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And the possibility of being a “big hit” varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. For example, reach effects such as normal, super A, and super B may be set in advance. Then, when a super-reach reach effect such as Super A or Super B is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” is higher than when a normal reach effect is executed. In addition, among the reach effects of the super reach, when the specific reach effect such as the super B is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the reach effect of the super A is executed.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) / {(the probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (other than the time of the big hit) ) (Probability that the effect will be executed) × (probability not to be a big hit)}.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, unlike the reach effect, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display as a message, an audio output, a lighting operation of the game effect lamp 909 or the decoration LED, etc. For example, there is a possibility that the decorative display variable display mode may become a reach mode, or that the variable display result may be a “hit”, due to a presentation operation different from the decorative display variable display operation, etc. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance of the advantage of the game executed in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. As long as it is executed before the reach mode is reached. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when such a notice effect is executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect may be any effect that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time depending on whether or not it is executed.

  Moreover, the special aspect super reach production may be set to be executable as the special production. The special aspect super reach effect is part of the normal aspect super reach effect in part or all of the period from the start of the super reach effect until the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived. All of the effects are different effects. When the special aspect super reach effect is executed in a part of the period from the start of the super reach effect until the definite decorative symbol resulting in the variable display result is derived, the effect mode of the super reach effect before and after that is the normal mode It becomes. When the special aspect super reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” than when only the normal aspect super reach effect is executed.

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 58 (B1), the special aspect super reach effect includes an aspect in which a mini character MG such as a kite or a beckoning cat is displayed together with a character CG or a special aspect message SG4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 58 (B2), the normal mode super reach effect is a mode in which the character CG and the normal mode message SG5 are displayed, but the mini character MG is not displayed.

  Further, the meter effect may be set to be executable. The meter effect is an effect of displaying a meter as a predetermined display on the image display device 905 and changing the display mode of the meter. Regardless of whether or not the meter effect is executed, the meter may be displayed on the image display device 905 at all times. The display mode of the meter is set to five levels of level 0 to level 4 as an example. In the meter effect, the display mode of the meter is level 0 indicating that no meter is accumulated, level 1 indicating that one meter is accumulated, level 2 indicating that two meters are accumulated, and meter 3 The display mode is sequentially changed to a display mode of level 3 indicating the state of accumulation and level 4 indicating the state of accumulation of the meter up to MAX.

  Note that the meter effect is not limited to one in which the display mode of the meter sequentially changes to the display mode of level 0 to level 4, that is, the one that changes toward the upper limit value of the meter. For example, the meter effect may be one in which the display mode of the meter sequentially changes from level 4 to level 0, i.e., toward the lower limit value of the meter.

  When the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the meter display mode changes to the level 4 display mode in the meter effect. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special aspect super reach effect is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is “lost”. That is, when the display mode of the meter is a level 4 display mode, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”.

  When the special mode super reach effect is executed, the meter display mode may change to a display mode of a specific level or higher such as level 3 in the meter effect. When the display mode of the meter becomes a display mode of level 3 or higher, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” may be increased.

  Moreover, while displaying the effect image of the aspect which alert | reports that a meter effect is performed as a notification effect which alert | reports that a variable display result may become "big hit", for example, a specific character image, for example, A notice effect may be prepared which is executed in a meter change notification mode in which a message image such as “I will collect” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. In this form, in the variable display in which the meter effect is executed, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode can be executed. It should be noted that the effect aspect of the notice effect may be an aspect other than an aspect informing that the meter effect is executed. The effect form of the notice effect may be an aspect that suggests how many levels of the meter should be raised, for example, an image such as “LV1UP” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Further, the effect mode of the notice effect may be a mode of notifying that the meter effect is executed by changing a part of the display for notifying that the variable display result may be a “big hit”. .

  Further, the tilt production may be set to be executable. The tilting effect displays an effect image, such as a specific character image, in which the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, and a message image such as “Accumulate” is displayed on the image display device 905. It is an effect displayed on the screen.

  The effects such as the notice effect and the tilt effect are not limited to those by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 905, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices. As an example of the notice effect or the tilt effect different from the image display, the effect may be an effect in which the display color of the decoration LED is changed, or an effect in which sound that is a special sound effect is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. May be. In addition to or in place of some or all of these notice effects and tilt effects, lighting or blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the movable effect member 9060, display of effect images, sound effects, etc. The output may be controlled to execute a notice effect or a tilt effect combining some or all of the outputs. In addition, the variable display result is “big hit” when a period in which a notice effect that combines a plurality of kinds of effect aspects is included, rather than when a notice effect is executed with only one kind of effect form. The possibility that a predetermined game value such as possibility is given may be increased.

  Furthermore, the movable effect member effect may be executed in response to a change in the display mode of the meter due to the meter effect. In the movable effect member effect, the movable effect member 9060 is moved from the non-tilting state to the tilting state, and then again moved to the non-tilting state, so that a part of the movable effect member 9060 is once advanced in front of the display area of the image display device 905. It is a production to do. This informs the player that the display mode of the meter changes due to the meter effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” It is only necessary that a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols all together.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display form of the decorative pattern does not become the reach form, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result In some cases, a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display The finalized decorative symbol that is the result may be derived and displayed.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.
In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time, and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  The CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, sets the interrupt disabled state, and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. Processing for controlling progress and the like is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process of making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR′1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR′2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value for determining a variation pattern There may be MR′3 and a random value MR′4 for determining the normal map display result. The random value MR'1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as "big hit". The random number MR′2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” as one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” and “probable change”. It is a numerical value. The random value MR′3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random number value MR′4 for determining the normal figure display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is “per normal figure” or “losing the normal figure”. It is a random value used for.

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B, setting of opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the special variable winning ball device 907, etc. in a predetermined procedure. . The normal symbol process is a process that controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 9020 to enable variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit an effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). In the start winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B are on. At this time, if the first start opening switch 9022A is on, the special game using the first special view is based on the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A. A first start winning process is performed to update the first special figure reserved memory number which is the number of reserved memories. On the other hand, if the second start opening switch 9022B is on, the special game using the second special view is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. The second start winning process for updating the second special figure reserved memory number which is the number of reserved memories is performed.

  As an example, in the first start winning process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure holding storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to After that, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning is extracted and stored as reserved data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  In the second start winning process, it is determined whether or not the second special figure holding memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the second special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value, the second start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Thus, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to After that, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning is extracted and stored as reserved data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. And execute.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display are displayed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit and the second special symbol storage unit. It is determined whether or not to start a special figure game by the device 904B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is variably displayed based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR′1 for determining the special symbol display result. Determined before results are derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special special symbol display device 904B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. The In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative design is set to “reach” by determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the fluctuation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the process after the special symbol starts to vary. Processing to measure time is included. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special special symbol display device 904B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. The process of setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting the open state for the big prize opening. It is included. In this process, for example, the normal opening round may be executed by setting the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened to “29 seconds”. Note that if the “big hit” type is provided for the big hit type, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 seconds” so that the short-term open round is executed. Good. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is in an open state, a measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the next round game when the upper limit number has not been reached. Includes a process of waiting until the process starts. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, or the like. Processing that waits until the time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling the probability variation state and the time-short state in response to success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 35 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. The CPU 90103 may read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S9021; NO), for example, the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 such as the head area of the second special figure storage part Then, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read (step S90232). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning at the second start winning port in the start winning determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 35 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit shifts the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the special fluctuation figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. The CPU 90103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. In other words, the special game may be executed in the order in which the game balls pass through the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning port or the second start winning port is associated with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. What is necessary is just to make it memorize | stored in the predetermined area | region of RAM90102, and to specify the order where starting conditions were satisfied about the special figure game corresponding to each holding data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), for example, the reservation data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 such as the first area of the first special figure storage unit Then, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read (step S90236). As a result, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning at the first start winning opening in the start winning determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 35 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total number of reserved memories may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90234 and S90238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR′1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. It only has to be done. The CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR′1 read from the variation random number buffer. Good.

  FIG. 37A shows an example of determining the special figure display result by the process of step S90239. In this way, whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “losing” is determined using the numerical data indicating the random value MR′1 for determining the special figure display result or the special figure display result determination table. What is necessary is just to determine at a predetermined ratio. In the determination example shown in FIG. 37A, the determination ratio of whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is varied depending on the presence or absence of probability variation control in the probability variation state. The CPU 90103 may determine that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is on.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is “a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time reduction state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, by the big hit end process of step S90117 shown in FIG. 35, the probability change control is performed based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability change”. In the state, the special figure display result is more likely to be “big hit” and more likely to be in the big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. The special figure display result is determined at a predetermined ratio according to the presence or absence of the probability variation control. On the other hand, determination values are assigned to the special graphic display results corresponding to the special graphic game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, the assignment of the decision value to the predetermined special figure display result differs between the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the case of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B. It may be allowed.

  Thereafter, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is “big hit” (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90241). Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR′2 for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types. The CPU 90103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR′2 read from the random number buffer for variation.

  FIG. 37B shows an example of determining the jackpot type by the process of step S90242. In this determination example, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change” at a predetermined rate. Depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the determinable jackpot type may be varied, or the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be varied. As an example, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the big hit type can be determined as “surprise” at a predetermined rate, while when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type is “surprise”. May be set so as not to be determined.

  After executing the processing of step S90242, the big hit type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S90240 (step S90240; NO), or after executing the process of step S90243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined. (Step S90244). As an example, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S90242. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol. More specifically, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” may be determined as the confirmed special symbol. When the big hit type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S90245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in the process of step S90245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S90111 shown in FIG. 35 is executed.

  In step S90235, if the number of reserved games of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S90235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S90246), and then the special symbol is set. End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for designating demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 has been transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Determine. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is not transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S90111 of FIG. 35 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 38A, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S90261; YES), a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S90262). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off (step S90261; NO), the variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S90263).

  FIG. 38B shows a variation pattern. In the case where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” which does not become the reach mode and “reach” which becomes the reach mode, respectively. Also, a plurality of variation patterns may be prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the process of step S90262 shown in FIG. 38A, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using, for example, a big hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR′3 for determining the variation pattern becomes a variation pattern determination result depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probability variation”. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 90103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR′3 read from the variation random number buffer, and when the variable display result becomes “big hit”. A corresponding variation pattern may be determined.

  In the process of step S90263 shown in FIG. 38 (A), corresponding to the case of the normal time when the game state is the normal state and the case of the short time control when the game state is the probability change state or the time-short state, The variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using any of a plurality of losing variation pattern determination tables prepared in advance. In the plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR′3 for determining the variation pattern is determined according to whether it is a normal time or a short time, and the total number of reserved memories. It only has to be assigned to the result. The CPU 90103 refers to one of the loss variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the normal time and the short time based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR′3 for determining the variation pattern read from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” may be determined.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is determined to be “non-reach” at a higher rate than when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number. It is sufficient that a decision value is assigned. In this way, when the number of special figure reservations stored is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the decorative symbol variable display mode may be set to be less likely to be determined as the reach mode than when it is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the number of special figure hold memory is relatively large, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the number of special figure storage is relatively small, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings can be suppressed. Can be stopped.

  FIG. 39A shows an example of determining the variation pattern at the time of big hit. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation pattern PA′3-1 is executed is the reach ratio of the super reach such as the change patterns PA′3-2 and PA′3-3. It is set to be lower than the determination ratio of the variation pattern to be performed.

  FIG. 39B shows an example of determining the variation pattern at the time of loss. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect such as the fluctuation pattern PA′2-1 is executed is the super-reach reach effect such as the change patterns PA′2-2 and PA′2-3. It is set to be higher than the determination ratio of the variation pattern to be performed.

  Moreover, at the time of big hit, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed is set to be higher than that at the time of the loss. Thereby, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 39 (A), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the super B reach effect such as the fluctuation pattern PA'3-3 is executed is the super A reach effect such as the fluctuation pattern PA'3-2. Is set to be higher than the determination ratio of the variation pattern to be executed. On the other hand, in the determination example shown in FIG. 39B, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super B reach effect is executed, such as the variation pattern PA′2-3, is super A, such as the variation pattern PA′2-2. It is set to be lower than the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the reach effect is executed. Moreover, at the time of big hit, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the super B reach effect is executed is set to be sufficiently higher than that at the time of losing. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the gaming state becomes the big hit gaming state, the variable display result is obtained after the reach effect of Super B is executed at a higher rate than when the big hit gaming state is not obtained. Derived.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), the variation pattern PA′2-1 to PA′2-3 and the variation pattern PA′3-1 to PA′3-3 have the same special diagram variation time and content. On the other hand, whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” is different. With the determination ratio setting shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B), when the reach reach effect of super reach is executed, the expected degree of jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of normal reach is executed. Further, when the reach effect of Super B is executed, the expectation level for jackpots is higher than when the reach effect of Super A is executed.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90262 and S90263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S90264). The special symbol variation time that becomes the variable display time of the special symbol is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 90103 can set the timing at which the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of step S90264, among the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, A setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games in which the start condition is satisfied (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B.

  After executing the processing of step S90265, command transmission setting is performed at the start of special symbol fluctuation (step S90266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 sends the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first variation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first change start command and the second change start command are the change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure in the second special special symbol display device 904B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game used. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S90267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S90267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 shown in FIG. 35 is executed.

Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described.
In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, set the register of the CTC mounted on the effect control board 9012, and the like. . Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among the input ports included in the I / O 90125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as a display operation of an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed, and numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by a random counter in the RAM 90122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the following processes in steps S90170 to S90176 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process performs variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 905 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special special symbol display device 904B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Including the process of deciding the decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result, etc., in order to perform variable display of the decorative symbol and other various effects Yes. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read out from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and various effects during the variable display of the decorative design. A process for performing the control is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to be included. It should be noted that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the confirmed decorative design may be displayed in a completely stopped manner. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 side autonomously does not depend on the production control command from the main board 9011. It is possible to determine and display the variable display result by deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative design. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop process, the jackpot gaming state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, and the like. The process which determines whether it is performed is included. When the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while the special figure display result corresponds to “losing” If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect for notifying the start of a jackpot gaming state based on the reception of a jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Then, when the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command to the sound control board 9013, and a game effect lamp 909 or a decoration LED is turned on / off / flashing by outputting a command to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, the value of the production process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, for example.

  The big hit end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot end effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command to the sound control board 9013, and a game effect lamp 909 or a decoration LED is turned on / off / flashing by outputting a command to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 41 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S90401). At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the change start time determination contents such as the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The final stop symbol is determined. “Non-reach (losing)”, “Reach (losing)”, “Non-probable change (big hit)”, “Probable change (big hit)”, etc. .

  FIG. 41B shows an example of determining a decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol in the process of step S90401. In this example, when the variation start determination content is “non-reach (loss)”, different decorative symbols are determined as the final stop symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 and stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. By referring to the prepared left determined symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the medium fixed decorative design updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to. As a result, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  When the change determination content is “reach (losing)”, the same decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, etc. By referring to the design pattern, the design pattern with the same design number that is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” design pattern display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 is prepared. Thus, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the middle decorative pattern becomes the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol, if the final decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, any value May be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative symbol, the difference between the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set.

  When the content of the determination at the start of fluctuation is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, the same is applied to the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The decoration design of is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L in the display area of the image display device 905, A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with 905C and 905R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, or whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, the normal symbol or the probable symbol is used as the final ornament symbol It may be determined. Specifically, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the jackpot type is “probability change” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes a definite decoration symbol is determined from a plurality of types of probability change symbols. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot promotion effect is to be executed even if the jackpot type is “probability change”, the determined symbol is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Thereby, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S90401, whether or not the probability change promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the jackpot promotion effect is executed when the determination content at the start of variation is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”. It may be determined. In the re-drawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, once it is difficult or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability variation state by variably displaying the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the ornament symbol of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation symbol. In addition, there is a case where the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. Moreover, what is necessary is just to be able to alert | report that it is controlled to a probability change state by performing promotion effect during a big hit at the time of a big hit game state or completion | finish of a big hit game state. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S90401, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before execution of the re-lottery effect may be determined.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a special aspect super reach effect determination process (step S90402). In step S90402, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the special aspect super reach effect that is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, whether or not to execute the special aspect super reach effect is determined by referring to the special aspect super reach effect determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121.

  FIG. 42 shows a configuration example of the special aspect super reach production determination table. In the special mode super reach production determination table shown in FIG. 42, for example, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern PA′3-2 in which the super reach reach production such as Super A or Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”. Or PA'3-3, or a special mode depending on whether the variable reach PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 has a variable display result when the reach effect of super reach is executed. The numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the super reach production is assigned to the determination result of either “execution performed” for executing the special mode super reach production or “no execution” for executing the special mode super reach production. Just do it. In FIG. 42, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result.

  In the special aspect super reach production determination table shown in FIG. 42, the fluctuation patterns are the fluctuation patterns PA'3-2 and PA'3-3 in which the super reach reach production is executed and the variable display result is "big hit". Regardless of whether or not the variation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 in which the reach display effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is “lost”, “executed” or “not executed” is set. It is set to be determined. When the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA'3-2 or PA'3-3 in which the super reach reach effect is executed and the variable display result is "big hit", the special aspect super reach effect is always executed. You may set as follows.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 42, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which the reach display effect of super reach is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”, the special pattern The determination ratio of “with execution” in which the aspect super reach effect is executed is set to be higher than the determination ratio of “without execution” in which the special aspect super reach effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 in which the variable reach result is "lost" when the super reach reach effect is executed, the special aspect super reach effect is executed. The determination ratio of “executed” is set to be lower than the determination ratio of “not executed” in which the special aspect super reach effect is not executed. Further, when the reach design of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is the variation pattern PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which the variable display result is “big hit”, the special mode super reach production is executed. The determination ratio of “Yes” is set to be sufficiently higher than the variation pattern PA′2-2 or PA′2-3 in which the variable display result is “lost” when the reach effect of super reach is executed. Has been. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the gaming state becomes the big hit gaming state, the variable display result is obtained after the special aspect super reach effect is executed at a higher rate than when the big hit gaming state is not obtained. Derived.

  After executing the process of step S90402, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a meter effect determination process (step S90403). FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90403 of FIG. 41A as the meter effect determination process. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a special aspect super reach effect is executed (step S90501). In step S90501, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine that there is execution of the special aspect super reach effect when “executed” is determined in step S90402.

  When it is determined in step S90501 that the special aspect super reach effect is executed (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing for changing the meter to MAX (step S90502). In step S90502, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 selects a MAX timing determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 as a use table for determining the timing for changing the meter to MAX. Set. In the MAX timing determination table, for example, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which a super-reach reach effect such as Super A or Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”. Compared with the random number value for determining the MAX timing, depending on whether there is a fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 in which the display result of the super-reach is executed and the variable display result is "losing" Is assigned to the decision result of either “High Speed Fluctuation” that changes the meter to MAX during high-speed fluctuation, or “During Super Reach” that changes the meter to MAX during Reach Reach. Just do it. Here, “high speed fluctuation” means that the decorative symbols are changing at high speed at a constant speed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the MAX timing determination table, for example, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for MAX timing determination extracted from a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122. Thus, the timing for changing the meter to MAX may be determined.

  FIG. 44 shows a configuration example of the MAX timing determination table. In this MAX timing determination table, the variation patterns are the variation patterns PA′3-2 and PA′3-3 in which the super-reach reach effect such as Super A and Super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, it is set so that it can be determined as “during high-speed fluctuation”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA′2-2 or PA′2-3 in which the reach display effect of super reach is executed and the variable display result is “lost”, it is not determined as “during high-speed fluctuation”. Is set to Therefore, when the meter changes to MAX during high-speed fluctuation, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and it is definitely announced that the variable display result is “big hit”.

  After executing the process of step S90502, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not “super-reach” is determined in step S90502 (step S90503). If it is determined in step S90503 that “super-reach” is determined (step S90503; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines to which level the meter is to be changed during high-speed fluctuation (step S90504). In step S90504, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation that is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to a high-speed fluctuation reaching level determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, it is determined which of the levels 0 to 2 is set as the high-speed fluctuation reaching level.

  FIG. 45 shows a configuration example of the high-speed fluctuation reaching level determination table used in step S90504. In the high-speed fluctuation reaching level determination table shown in FIG. 45, a numerical value to be compared with the random number for determining the high-speed fluctuation reaching level only needs to be assigned to one of the determination results of level 0 to level 3. In FIG. 45, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. As an example, the determination ratios of level 0 to level 3 are set regardless of the special figure variation time. However, the determination ratio may be set differently depending on the special figure fluctuation time. For example, depending on whether the level 0 to the level 3 are a variation pattern in which a Super A reach effect is executed or a change pattern in which a Super B reach effect is executed You may decide by. In addition, the level 0 to the level 3 may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”.

  After executing the process of step S90504, or when it is determined in step S90503 that it is not determined to be “in super reach” (step S90503; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the meter effect determination process.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that the special aspect super reach effect is not executed (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the meter effect that does not change the meter to MAX. (Step S90505). In step S90505, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the meter effect that becomes a gas updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, the presence or absence of execution of the meter effect that becomes a gusset is determined by referring to the meter effect determination table that becomes a gusset that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

  FIG. 46 shows a configuration example of a meter effect determination table that becomes a frustration. In the meter effect determination table to be a gusset shown in FIG. 46, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining the meter effect to be a gusset is “executed” for executing the meter effect to be a gusset, and a meter effect to be a gusset is executed. It is only necessary to be assigned to any determination result of “no execution”. In FIG. 46, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result.

  As an example, in the meter effect determination table that is a frustration shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the meter effect is always executed. As described above, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the gaming state becomes the big hit gaming state, The special aspect super reach effect is set to be executed at a higher rate than the case where the gaming state is not reached. With such settings, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the meter effect is executed.

  After executing the process of step S90505, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not the meter effect that becomes a frustration is executed (step S90506). When it is determined in step S90506 that the meter effect that becomes a frustration is executed (step S90506; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 finally determines to what level the meter is to be changed (step S90507).

  In step S90507, as an example, when determining the final arrival level of the meter, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating the final arrival level determination random number value updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter or the like. To do. Subsequently, by referring to a final arrival level determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, it is determined which of the levels 1 to 3 is set as the final arrival level.

  FIG. 47 shows a configuration example of the final arrival level determination table used in step S90507. In the final arrival level determination table shown in FIG. 47, a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the final arrival level may be assigned to any determination result of level 1 to level 3. In FIG. 47, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. As an example, the ratio that is determined as the final achievement level increases is set to be lower. For example, the level 1 to the level 3 may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”.

  After executing the processing of step S90507, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to what level the meter that is not changed to MAX is changed during high-speed fluctuation (step S90508). For example, when the final arrival level is determined to be level 1 in step S90507, in step S90508, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation is level 0 or level 1. When the final arrival level is determined to be level 2 in step S90507, in step S90508, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation is set to level 0 to level 2. If the final arrival level is determined to be level 3 in step S90507, in step S90508, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the level 0 to level 3 the high-speed fluctuation arrival level is. In step S90508, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation that is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to a high-speed fluctuation reaching level determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, it is determined which of the levels 0 to 3 is set as the high-speed fluctuation reaching level.

  In the process of step S90508, when the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation is determined to be lower than the final arrival level determined in step S90507, the meter effect is executed again during super reach and the meter reaches the final arrival level. Change to the level. On the other hand, in the process of step S90508, if the final arrival level determined in step S90507 is determined as the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation, is the meter not changed even if the meter effect is executed during super reach? During the super reach, the meter effect should not be executed.

  FIG. 48 shows a configuration example of the high-speed fluctuation reaching level determination table used in step S90508. In the high-speed fluctuation arrival level determination table shown in FIG. 48, for example, the final arrival level of the meter in the meter effect that becomes a frustration depends on whether it is level 1, level 2, or level 3. A numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining the reaching level during the change only needs to be assigned to any of the determination results of level 0 to level 3. In FIG. 48, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. As an example, the determination ratios of level 0 to level 3 are set regardless of the special figure variation time. However, the determination ratio may be set differently depending on the special figure fluctuation time. For example, depending on whether the level 0 to the level 3 are a variation pattern in which a Super A reach effect is executed or a change pattern in which a Super B reach effect is executed You may decide by. In addition, the level 0 to the level 3 may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”.

  Moreover, when the meter effect which becomes a frustration is performed, as an example, it is set so that the rate determined as the arrival level during high speed fluctuation increases. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45, when the meter effect that changes the meter to MAX is executed, the ratio determined as the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation increases is set to be lower. When the meter changes to MAX, a special aspect super reach effect is always executed. As described above, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the gaming state becomes the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state It is set so that the special aspect super reach production is executed at a higher rate than the case where it does not. With these settings, when the meter does not change during high-speed fluctuation, or when the level of the meter changed during high-speed fluctuation is small, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when the level of the meter changed during high-speed fluctuation is large .

  After executing the process of step S90508 or when it is determined in step S90506 that there is no execution of the meter effect that becomes a frustration (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the meter effect determination process.

  After executing the process of step S90403, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a notice effect determination process (step S90404). FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S90404 of FIG. 41A as the notice effect determination process. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the notice effect (step S90521). In step S90521, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 selects a notice effect determination table prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect. set. In the notice effect determination table, for example, whether the variable display result specified by the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011 is “big hit” or “losing”, or the meter effect during the super reach effect. Depending on the amount of change in the meter, the numerical value compared with the random number for determining the notice effect is assigned to the decision result of either “execution executed” for executing the notice effect or “not executed” not executing the notice effect. It only has to be done. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the notice effect determination table based on numerical data indicating the random value for the notice effect determination extracted from the effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122, for example. Thus, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect.

  FIG. 50A shows a configuration example of the notice effect determination table selected as the use table when the meter effect during the super reach effect is not executed. In this notice effect determination table, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined as “executed” is set to be higher than the ratio determined as “not executed”. Further, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined as “executed” is set to be lower than the ratio determined as “not executed”. By setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50 (A), when the notice effect is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the notice effect is not executed. The amount of meter to be changed by the meter effect executed during super reach may be calculated by, for example, subtracting the meter level to be changed during fluctuation from the meter level to be finally changed.

  FIG. 50B shows a configuration example of the notice effect determination table selected as the use table when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed. This notice effect determination table is set so that “no execution” is always determined when the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 1 level or 2 level. In addition, when the amount of change in the meter in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 3 level or 4 level, the ratio determined as “executed” is higher than the ratio determined as “not executed”. Is set to Further, as described above, in the variable display in which the meter effect is executed, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed. Therefore, when the notification effect in the meter change notification mode is executed by the setting of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50B, the super reach effect is being performed compared to the case where the notification effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed. The amount of meter change in the meter production is large.

  After executing the process of step S90521, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the notice effect is executed (step S90522). When it is determined in step S90522 that the notice effect is executed (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the meter effect is executed during the super reach effect (step S90523). In the process of step S90523, for example, when it is determined to change the meter to MAX during the super reach effect in the process of step S90502 in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. If the final achievement level is not determined as the level, it may be determined that the meter effect is being executed during the super reach effect.

  If it is determined in step S90523 that the meter effect is being executed during the super reach effect (step S90523; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the notice effect as the meter change notification mode (step S90524). ).

  After executing the process of step S90524, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode (step S90525). In step S90525, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 calculates the amount of meter to be changed by the meter effect executed during the super reach. Subsequently, by referring to the notice effect execution period determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the notice effect execution period in the meter change notification mode is 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds. Decide which one to use. The amount of meter to be changed by the meter effect executed during super reach may be calculated by, for example, subtracting the meter level to be changed during fluctuation from the meter level to be finally changed.

  FIG. 51 shows a configuration example of the notice effect execution period determination table used in step S90525. In the notice effect execution period determination table shown in FIG. 51, the determination result of any one of 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, and 10 seconds corresponding to the amount of the meter changed by the meter effect executed during the super reach. As long as it is assigned to. As an example, the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is set longer as the amount of the meter to be changed in the meter effect executed during the super reach increases. With the setting shown in FIG. 51, when the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is long, the player changes that the meter changes to MAX than when the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is short. Can give a sense of expectation.

  When it is determined in step S90523 that the meter effect is not executed (step S90523; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the notice effect as an effect mode other than the meter change notification mode (step). S90526). In step S90526, the meter change notification mode may be determined at a predetermined determination rate. When the meter change notification mode is determined in step S90526, the meter change notification mode notice effect is executed even though the meter effect is not executed. Thus, although the meter effect is not executed, the notice effect of the meter change notification mode that becomes a frustration may be executed.

  After executing the process of step S90525, or after executing the process of step S90526, if it is determined in step S90522 that the notice effect is not executed (step S90522; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the notice effect. The process ends.

  After executing the process of step S90404, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the tilt effect determination process (step S90405). In step S90405, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and sets the tilt effect determination table prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 as a use table for determining the execution of the tilt effect. . In the tilt production determination table, for example, a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the tilt production according to whether or not the notice production in the meter change notification mode is executed is “execution executed” to execute the tilt production. It is only necessary to be assigned to any determination result of “no execution” that does not execute the tilt production. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the tilt effect determination table based on numerical data indicating the random value for determining the tilt effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, for example. Thus, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the tilt production.

  FIG. 52 shows a configuration example of the tilt production determination table. This tilt effect determination table is set so that the ratio determined to “executed” is higher than the ratio determined to “not executed” when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed. ing. Further, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed, the ratio determined as “executed” is set to be lower than the ratio determined as “not executed”. With the setting of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 52, when the tilt effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed is higher than when the tilt effect is not executed.

  When the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, the ratio determined as “executed” is set to be lower than the ratio determined as “not executed”, and the meter change notification mode is set. When the notice effect at is not executed, the ratio determined as “executed” may be set to be higher than the ratio determined as “not executed”. Regardless of whether or not the notice effect is executed, the ratio determined as “executed” may be set to be the same as the ratio determined as “not executed”.

  After performing the process of step S90405, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the effect control pattern as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90406). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 can select any one of a plurality of special figure fluctuation effect control patterns prepared in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and the various effects determined in the processes of steps S90402 to S90405. Select and set as the usage pattern.

  After executing the processing of step S90406, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step S90407). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90408). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90406 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The variation of the decorative pattern may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided on the display screen.

  Following the processing of step S90408, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, settings are made to update the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H (step S90409). For example, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” in the start winning storage display area 905H may be deleted and the entire display part may be moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90410), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S90451). ). As an example, in the process of step S90451, the presentation control process timer value is updated, and when an end code is read out from a predetermined presentation control pattern corresponding to the updated presentation control process timer value, the variable display time It may be determined that has passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the tilt effect execution period (step S90452). The tilt production execution period may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined as the usage pattern according to the setting in step S90405, for example. When it is determined in step S90452 that it is the tilting effect execution period (step S90452; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes tilting effect operation control processing for executing the tilting effect (step S90453).

  After performing the process of step S90453, or when it is determined in step S90452 that it is not a live effect execution period (step S90452; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is a notice effect execution period ( Step S90454). The notice effect execution period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern according to the setting in step S90404, for example. When it is determined in step S90454 that it is the notice effect execution period (step S90454; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a notice effect operation control process for executing the notice effect (step S90455). In step S90455, CPU 90120 for effect control executes the notice effect in the meter change notification mode when the meter change notification mode is determined in step S90524.

  After performing the process of step S90455 or when it is determined in step S90454 that it is not the notice effect execution period (step S90454; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the meter effect execution period ( Step S90456). The meter effect execution period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in accordance with the setting in step S90403, for example. When it is determined in step S90456 that it is the meter effect execution period (step S90456; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a meter effect operation control process for executing the meter effect (step S90457).

  After executing the process of step S90457 or when it is determined in step S90456 that it is not the meter effect execution period (step S90456; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect. It is determined whether or not (step S90458). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in accordance with the variation pattern or the setting in step S90402. When it is determined in step S90458 that it is the reach effect execution period (step S90458; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect operation control for executing the reach effect (step S90459). For example, in the process of step S90459, in order to execute a reach effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern or the like, various commands are created and the display control unit 90123 or the voice control board is generated. 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the motor drive circuit 9016, etc. may be transmitted. Thereby, displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the image display device 905, outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, blinking or lighting the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED, It is only necessary that the reach effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating the movable effect member 9060 or by combining some or all of them.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the reach effect operation control process executed in step S90459 of FIG. In the reach effect operation control process shown in FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not it is the super reach effect execution period (step S90601). When it is determined in step S90601 that it is not the super reach effect execution period (step S90601; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a normal reach effect operation control process for executing a normal reach effect (normal reach effect) ( Step S90602).

  When it is determined in step S90601 that it is the super reach production execution period (step S90601; YES), the production control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the special aspect super reach production execution period (step S90603). When it is determined in step S90603 that it is not the special aspect super reach effect execution period (step S90603; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a normal aspect super reach effect operation control process for executing the normal aspect super reach effect. (Step S90604).

  When it is determined in step S90603 that it is the special aspect super reach effect execution period (step S90603; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 performs a special aspect super reach effect operation control process for executing the special aspect super reach effect. It executes (step S90605).

  After executing the process of step S90602, after executing the process of step S90604, or after executing the process of step S90605, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the reach effect operation control process.

  If it is determined in step S90458 that it is not the reach effect execution period (step S90458; NO), after executing the process of step S90459, the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the variation pattern In addition, after performing the presentation operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative design based on the setting in (Step S90460), the presentation process during variable display is ended.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; YES), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90461). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90461; NO), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S90461 (step S90461; YES), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol as a display result is performed (step S90462). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving a hit start designation command (step S90463). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90464), and then the variable display effect process is ended.

Next, the execution timing of meter effects and the like will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 55A shows a special symbol based on a variation pattern PA′2-2, PA′2-3, PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which a super reach effect such as Super A or Super B is executed. The example of the execution timing of the reach effect in the variable display, the tilt effect, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the meter effect, and the special mode super reach effect is shown. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA′2-2 or PA′3-2 is set to 65 seconds. Further, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA′2-3 or PA′3-3 is set to 78 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55A, after the variable symbol special display is started at the timing T0 (0 seconds), the meter effect during high-speed fluctuation is started at the timing T1 (for example, 4 seconds after the timing T0). In this example, when a meter effect during high-speed fluctuation is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes to level 1 at a predetermined timing. Then, the meter effect during high-speed fluctuation is terminated at timing T2 (for example, 8 seconds after timing T0). Then, after starting the normal reach effect at the timing T3 (for example, 12 seconds after the timing T0), the normal mode super reach effect is started at the timing T4 (for example, 20 seconds after the timing T0). Then, at timing T5 (for example, 28 seconds after timing T0), the production starts. Then, at the timing T6 (for example, 32 seconds after the timing T0), the effect is finished, and the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is started. Then, at the timing T7 (for example, 36 seconds after the timing T0 (4 seconds after the timing T6)), the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is ended and the meter effect during the super reach is started. In this example, when the meter effect during the super reach is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes by three levels from the level 1 display mode to the level 4 MAX display mode at a predetermined timing. I will do it. Then, at the timing T8 (for example, 44 seconds after the timing T0), the meter effect ends, and the super reach effect shifts from the normal mode super reach effect to the special mode super reach effect. Then, at timing T9 (for example, 52 seconds after timing T0), the super reach production shifts from the special mode super reach production to the normal mode super reach production. And, in timing T10 (for example, in the variable display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern PA′2-2 or PA′3-2, 65 seconds after the timing T0, based on the variation pattern PA′2-3 or PA′3-3. In the special symbol variable display, the special symbol variable display ends at 78 seconds after the timing T0.

  FIG. 55 (B) shows a special symbol based on a variation pattern PA′2-2, PA′2-3, PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which a super reach effect such as Super A or Super B is executed. The example of the execution timing of reach production and meter production in variable display is shown. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'3-2 is set to 65 seconds. Further, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA'2-3 or PA'3-3 is set to 78 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55A, after the variable symbol special display is started at the timing T0 (0 seconds), the meter effect during high-speed fluctuation is started at the timing T1 (for example, 4 seconds after the timing T0). In this example, when a meter effect during high-speed fluctuation is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes to level 1 at a predetermined timing. Then, the meter effect during high-speed fluctuation is terminated at timing T2 (for example, 8 seconds after timing T0). Then, after starting the normal reach effect at the timing T3 (for example, 12 seconds after the timing T0), the normal mode super reach effect is started at the timing T4 (for example, 20 seconds after the timing T0). Then, the meter effect during the super reach is started at the timing T7 (for example, 36 seconds after the timing T0). In this example, when the meter effect during the super reach is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes by two levels from the level 1 display mode to the level 3 display mode at a predetermined timing. Go. Then, the meter effect ends at timing T8 (for example, 44 seconds after timing T0). The normal mode super reach effect is also executed in a period from timing T8 to timing T9 (for example, 52 seconds after timing T0), which corresponds to a period during which the special mode super reach effect can be executed. And, in timing T10 (for example, in the variable display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern PA′2-2 or PA′3-2, 65 seconds after the timing T0, based on the variation pattern PA′2-3 or PA′3-3. In the special symbol variable display, the special symbol variable display ends at 78 seconds after the timing T0.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B), the production time from timing T8 to timing T9 is set to the same time regardless of whether or not the special aspect super reach production is executed. . As described above, the super reach effect is executed regardless of whether the change pattern is a change pattern in which the super reach effect of Super A is executed or a change pattern in which the super reach effect of Super B is executed. In the case of the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 secures the effect time of the special aspect super reach effect and can execute it. Therefore, in the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, it is not necessary to prepare a different variation pattern depending on whether or not the special mode super reach effect is executed, and the capacity for storing the variation pattern is suppressed. be able to.

  Next, main effect screens when the meter effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  FIG. 56 shows an effect screen when the meter effect is executed after the tilt effect and the notice effect in the meter change notification mode are executed in the variable display in which the super reach effect is executed, and the tilt effect is executed. An effect screen when the meter effect is executed without executing the notice effect in the meter change mode, and an effect when the meter effect is executed without executing either the tilt effect or the notice effect in the meter change mode Show the screen.

  FIG. 56A shows the effect screen when the super reach effect is started. As shown in FIG. 56A, the meter MT is always displayed as a predetermined display regardless of whether or not the meter effect is being executed. As described above, the meter effect can be executed even during high-speed fluctuation, but in FIG. 56A, the display mode of the meter MT changes due to the meter effect during high-speed fluctuation. A state in which the display mode is level 1 is shown. Also, the display mode of the meter MT is changed to a high-level display mode, in other words, the “level” of the meter MT is compared to the “virtuality” that protects the Buddha and the like. . Then, depending on how much “virtuality” is finally accumulated, that is, depending on the final achievement level of the meter MT, the action of the character CG in various effects executed during the super reach effect and the super reach effect, etc. Different. For example, if an effect is performed in which the character CG takes an active action to accumulate “virtues”, the fact that many “virtues” will eventually accumulate, that is, the final achievement level of the meter MT is high. It can give the player a sense of expectation regarding the level.

  If it is determined in step S90405 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 41 (A) that the tilt effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 56 (B1) at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect. Aori production is executed. As a tilt effect, the character CG is displayed, and a message SG1 such as “Talk and accumulate virtue” is displayed. In addition, as the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, an effect in a mode in which the character CG tries to accumulate “virtues” by visiting the shrine is executed. Therefore, as a tilting effect, the character CG is displayed and a message SG1 such as “Speak and accumulate virtue” is displayed, for example. Can give people a sense of expectation.

  If it is determined in step S90404 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 41A that the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is to be executed, at a predetermined timing after the tilt effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 56 (C1), the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed. As a notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the character CG is displayed and, for example, a message CG2 such as “I will accumulate virtue” is displayed. If the display mode of the meter MT changes to MAX, that is, if “Toku” accumulates to MAX, the special mode super reach effect is always executed. And when special aspect super reach production is performed, possibility that a variable display result will be a "big hit" becomes high compared with the case where special aspect super reach production is not performed. Therefore, as a notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the character CG is displayed and, for example, the message CG2 such as “I will accumulate virtue” is displayed, so that “virtue” accumulates up to MAX, that is, the meter MT It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that the display mode changes to MAX.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S90405 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 41A, it is decided not to execute the tilt effect, and the process of step S90404 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. If it is decided not to execute the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, as shown in FIGS. 56 (B2) and (C2), the tilt effect and the notice effect in the meter change notification mode are not executed. The normal aspect super reach production is executed. As a normal aspect super reach effect, a character CG is displayed, and a message CG3 such as “Do n’t be good” is displayed. Here, the message CG3 displayed in the normal mode super reach effect is an expression that excessively increases the player's expectation that “virtue” accumulates, that is, the display mode of the meter MT changes. For example, it may be a message with a level of expression such as “How do I get things done?” Or “I want to do something good”.

  Also, it is decided to execute the tilt effect in the process of step S90405 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 41A, and the process of step S90404 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. If it is decided not to execute the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the tilt effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 56 (C2), the normal mode super reach effect is executed without executing the notice effect in the meter change notification mode. In this way, the tilting effect that becomes a frustration may be executed.

  As shown in the notice effect execution determination table of FIG. 50, when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed, if the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 3 level or 4 level, The notice effect in the meter change notification mode may be executed without fail. Therefore, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode as shown in FIG. 56 (C1) is executed and the meter effect in the super reach effect is executed, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed. At a later predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 56 (D1), a meter effect having a large meter change amount is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in the notice effect execution determination table of FIG. 50, when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed, the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect may be 1 level or 2 level. For example, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed. Therefore, when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed without executing the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, as shown in FIG. 56 (D2) at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect, A meter effect in a mode in which the change amount of the meter is small is executed.

  Further, as described above, the movable effect member effect may be executed in response to the change of the meter display mode in the meter effect. When the movable effect member effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D1) and (D2), the movable effect member 9060 changes from the non-tilt state to the tilt state, and then changes to the non-tilt state again. An effect in which a part of the effect member 9060 advances to the front of the display area of the image display device 905 is executed. When the movable effect member effect is executed, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 9060. When the movable production member 9060 that imitates “Ouchi no Kozuchi” that appears in fairy tales, etc., changes from the non-tilting state to the non-tilting state, and then becomes non-tilting again, as if “Ouchi no Kozuchi” vibrates. An effect as if it were played is performed. Then, for example, on the screen of the image display device 905, a predetermined effect is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 in accordance with the timing at which the movable effect member 9060 that imitates “Uchi no Kochi”. The effect image is displayed in such a manner that an oval comes out of the movable effect member 9060 simulating “. At that time, as shown in FIG. 56 (D1), when a meter effect having a large amount of change in the meter is executed, an effect image having a mode in which a large number of small figures are displayed is displayed. As shown in (D2), when a meter effect in a mode in which the amount of change in the meter is small is executed, an effect image in a mode in which only a small amount of oval is displayed is displayed. Thus, not only the amount of change of the meter but also the effect mode is different between the case where the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed and the case where the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed. By this, the interest of meter production can be improved more.

  FIG. 57 shows an effect screen when the meter effect is executed after the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed in the variable display in which the super reach effect is executed.

  In the process of step S90525 in the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 49, when it is determined that the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is 8 seconds, at a predetermined timing after the tilt effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 57A to 57B, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed for 8 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is 4 seconds, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the meter change is performed at a predetermined timing after the tilt effect is executed. The notice effect in the notification mode is executed for 4 seconds.

  When the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed for 8 seconds, the meter MT is increased by 4 levels in the meter effect during the super reach effect that is executed thereafter. Since level 4 is set to MAX as the level of meter MT, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed for 8 seconds, meter MT before the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed. Regardless of the level, the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed, so that the meter MT is always MAX as shown in FIG. 57 (C1).

  On the other hand, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed only for 4 seconds, the meter MT increases by only three levels in the meter effect during the super reach effect that is executed thereafter. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), when the level of the meter MT before the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed is level 0, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed. However, if the production time is 4 seconds, the display mode of the meter MT does not become MAX as shown in FIG. 57 (C2).

  FIG. 58 shows an effect screen when the display mode of the meter MT is changed to MAX in the meter effect during the super reach effect and the special mode super reach effect is executed, and the meter MT in the meter effect during the super reach effect. The display screen when the normal mode super reach effect is executed without executing the special mode super reach effect without changing the display mode to MAX is shown.

  FIG. 58 (A1) shows an effect screen when the display mode of the meter MT changes to MAX in the meter effect during the super reach effect. Thus, when the display mode of the meter MT changes to MAX, the special mode super reach effect is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter as shown in FIG. 58 (B1). As a special aspect super reach production, a character CG is displayed and, for example, a message SG4 having a special aspect such as “may be profitable” or a mini character MG that is a symbol of an auspicious object such as a bag or a beckoning cat is displayed. When the variable display result is “big hit”, an effect that seems to be beneficial is executed as an effect of notifying the effect result of the super reach effect. Therefore, as a special aspect super reach production, while displaying the character CG, for example, by displaying a message SG4 of a special aspect such as “may be profitable” or a mini character MG that is a symbol of an auspicious object such as a spear or a beckoning cat, It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that the variable display result will be a “hit”.

  FIG. 58 (A2) shows the effect screen when the display mode of the meter MT does not change to MAX in the meter effect during the super reach effect. As described above, when the display mode of the meter MT does not change to MAX, the special mode super reach effect is not executed even when the predetermined timing thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (B2), Normal aspect super reach production is performed. While the character CG is displayed as a normal aspect super reach effect that is executed in correspondence with a period during which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed, a normal mode message SG5 such as “may happen to be good” is displayed. A mini character MG that is a symbol of an auspicious object such as a kite or a beckoning cat is not displayed. The message SG5 displayed in the normal aspect super reach effect that is executed in correspondence with the period during which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed, excessively increases the player's expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit”. For example, the message may be a message with a degree of expression such as “maybe chance” or “this fluctuation may happen”.

  When the period during which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed ends, the normal aspect super reach effect is executed regardless of whether the special aspect super reach effect or the normal aspect super reach effect is executed. An effect in a manner of notifying the effect result of the effect is executed. When the variable display result is “big hit”, as an effect of notifying the effect of the super reach effect, for example, a character KG that imitates God appears on the treasure ship FG as shown in FIG. 58 (C1). A production that seems to be very profitable is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, as an effect of informing the effect of the super reach effect, for example, as shown in FIG. A production that seems unlikely to be profitable, such as the appearance of only the ship BG, is executed.

  Then, as an effect of informing the effect of the super reach effect, when an effect that seems to be beneficial as shown in FIG. 58 (C1) is executed, as shown in FIG. 58 (D1), By displaying the same decorative symbols all together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is displayed. Derived and displayed.

  On the other hand, when an effect that is unlikely to be profitable as shown in FIG. 58 (C2) is executed as an effect of informing the effect of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 58 (D2), The decorative symbols constituting the predetermined reach combination are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The determined decorative design is derived and displayed.

  Next, in such a pachinko gaming machine 901, an example in which the volume as the effect is adjusted by the player's adjustment operation will be described.

  Further, the volume as a game effect can be adjusted by the player's adjustment operation during the game or during the customer waiting demonstration display. Further, when the sound volume is adjusted, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an adjustment result image indicating the sound volume adjustment result in a manner superimposed on the effect image and the demo image in a predetermined area of the image display device 905. The adjustment result image is displayed, for example, in a bar graph display mode that increases or decreases in the left-right direction. The mode of the adjustment result image is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode that displays a numerical value or a character corresponding to the volume, a pie chart mode, or the like. In the menu mode, the volume can be adjusted only when the “volume adjustment” item is selected from the menu screen and the volume adjustment mode is selected. Further, in response to accepting a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the menu mode is shifted from the customer waiting demonstration display.

  FIG. 59A is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 905. As shown in FIG. 59A, the display area of the adjustment result image R overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display area Ar.

  FIG. 59B is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the demonstration display. During the demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, an image indicating that a customer waiting demonstration such as “Demo Displaying” is being displayed is displayed on the image display device 905, and if an adjustment operation is performed, The adjustment result image R is superimposed on the demonstration display image.

  FIG. 59C1 is a display example of the menu screen in the menu mode. The volume adjustment is possible only when the player performs a volume adjustment mode selection operation in the menu mode and the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in FIG. 59 (C2). Selection of items in the menu mode is possible, for example, by tilting the stick controller. With the “Volume adjustment” item selected, the stick controller trigger button can be pushed or pushed. Or the like, the screen changes to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. The operation means for selecting an item is not limited to the stick controller, and may be a cross key or the like.

  FIGS. 59D1 and 59D2 are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process. The error image is not deleted during the derivation display of the variable display result, and is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R. Is done.

  Here, a main example of the case where the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the predetermined period T1 is the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the most recent adjustment operation is performed, but at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derived display period T2 Is overlapped, the adjustment result image R is deleted. The example shown in FIG. 60A is a case where the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 60B is a case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again, and the predetermined period The display is continued until T1 has elapsed. Although not shown, when the derived display period T1 overlaps the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. Thus, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  Next, an example in which the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the decorative symbol variable display is executed and the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 61 (A), a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (B). By displaying a simple development notification image on the image display device 905, the development notification to the super reach is performed. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG.

  Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. When an operation using the push button is performed, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. Note that, when an operation with a push button is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined time T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P. However, in the derived display period T2 of the variable display result, the adjustment result image R is deleted as shown in FIG. 61 (E) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, the fall of the visibility of the variable display result derived | led-out displayed can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the notice effect in the meter change notification mode. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a meter effect that can change the display mode of the meter MT to MAX. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed before the meter effect during the super reach effect and when the meter effect during the super reach effect is not executed. Since the amount of change of the meter when changing the display mode of the meter MT in the production and the amount of oval displayed as a predetermined effect are made different, it is possible to improve the interest of the meter production that changes the display mode of the meter MT. it can.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the super reach effect when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed before executing the meter effect during the super reach effect. When the meter change notification mode is not executed before the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed before the meter effect during the super reach effect is changed, the meter is in the super reach effect. Since the meter is changed only at one level or two levels in the meter production, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the notice production in the meter change notification mode is executed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control uses 8 seconds when the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 4 levels as the notice effect in the meter change notification mode. When the notice effect is executed and the change amount of the meter in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 3 levels, the notice effect for 4 seconds is executed, so the interest of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is improved. Can do.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a warning effect in the meter change notification mode, so that the notification in the meter change notification mode can be executed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation that the production will be executed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the special aspect super reach effect in response to the change of the display aspect of the meter MT to MAX, so that the display aspect of the meter MT is It is possible to improve the player's expectation to change to MAX.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, when the sound volume is adjusted, the effect control CPU 90120 superimposes the adjustment result image indicating the sound volume adjustment result on the effect image and the demo image in the predetermined area of the image display device 905. Displayed in the manner described above. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the adjustment result image R during the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result, so that the visibility of the variable display result can be prevented from being lowered.

[Example of re-displaying the meter after erasing the special effect]
Next, when a special effect such as a super reach effect is executed, the display of the meter MT is once erased, and then the meter MT is redisplayed according to the operation of the movable effect member 9060. An example of the effect of executing “will be described. The “re-display effect after once erasing the meter” described below can be executed in addition to the various effects described above or separately from the effects.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the display of the meter MT is a suggestion display that suggests an expectation that is advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of stages, and is executed at least during the variable display. Is possible. As such a change effect that can change the display mode of the suggestion display, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 and the like, such as an effect that can change the display mode of the meter MT according to the operation of the movable effect member 9060 Production can be performed.

  The meter MT is basically an image that is always displayed on the image display device 905, and can give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous state such as a big hit (a state advantageous for the player) depending on the level of the display mode. This is a suggestion display that produces an effect. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, various other special effects are provided as effects that allow the image display device 905 to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous state such as a big hit. For this reason, when the special effect is executed, the player may pay more attention to the special effect than the meter MT. In such a case, if the meter MT is continuously displayed, the display of the meter MT is the special effect. There is a risk of getting in the way. Therefore, when executing a predetermined special effect, in order not to interfere with the special effect, an effect of temporarily erasing the display of the meter MT or the like can be performed, and a “redisplay effect after erasing the meter once” can be executed. It is.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an effect screen for a redisplay effect after erasing the meter. 62 (A) to (D1) and (D2), an example of an image displayed when a re-display effect is executed after the meter is once erased by the image display device 905 is shown as time elapses. . Redisplay effect after erasing the meter indicates whether or not the image display device 905 develops (shifts), for example, from a normal reach effect to a super reach effect when variable display as a variable display of decorative symbols is executed. This can be executed in response to the execution of the reach development propriety effect.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, in the above-described decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, variable display (variable display) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols 9051, 9052, and 9053 is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the “left” and “right” decorative symbols 9051 and 9053 stop at the same symbol and reach the reach display mode, the normal reach effect is executed. In the image display device 905, the meter MT is displayed before such variable display is started, and the meter MT is displayed even after the start of the variable display.

  When a specific reach variation pattern (including a specific normal reach variation pattern and a specific super reach variation pattern) is executed, when the reach display mode is set, first, as shown in FIG. The execution of is started. When the first time (several seconds) elapses from the start of the normal reach production, the reach development possibility production effect is executed as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the reach development propriety effect may be executed immediately after the start of the normal reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (C), in the reach development enable / disable effect, a shutter image 9054 that imitates a shutter appears in the direction indicated by a broken-line arrow in the drawing, and the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, and 9053 displayed so far are displayed. This is an effect that suggests whether or not the variable display is developed (shifted) to a super reach effect by performing shutter display that closes the shutter in a display mode capable of shielding an image such as the meter MT. By performing such a shutter display, the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the image of the meter MT are once erased in an effect mode shielded by the shutter image 9054.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (C), in the reach development propriety effect, on the image display device 905 on which the shutter image 9054 is displayed, characters “chance” that can notify that the player is in a chance state are displayed. The chance character image 9055 is displayed in a display area at least partially overlapping the display area in which the meter MT was previously displayed. In the reach development enable / disable effect, it is necessary to erase the meter MT once because the chance character image 9055 is displayed in the display area overlapping the meter MT.

  The chance character image 9055 may be always displayed when the reach development propriety effect is executed, and whether or not to display when the reach development propriety effect is executed is randomly selected by lottery. You may do. When selecting whether to display the chance character image 9055 by lottery, for example, when the variable display result is a jackpot display result, the selection is displayed more than when the variable display result is out of display. The selection ratio displayed may differ depending on whether it is advantageous to the player, such as increasing the ratio.

  When a second time (longer than the first time) has elapsed since the start of the normal reach production, the shutter image 9054 and the chance character image 9055 are erased by displaying the shutter image 9054 so that the shutter is opened. Thus, the shutter display ends, and the images of the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT that have been once erased are displayed again as shown in FIG. 62 (D1) or (D2). As a result, the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT, which have been shielded by the shutter image 9054, are re-displayed in an effect mode in which they appear again.

  When the variation pattern is a specific normal reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 62 (D1), after the end of the shutter display in the reach development enable / disable effect, the decorative pattern 9051, 9052, 9053 and meter MT images are displayed in the normal reach effect mode. The normal reach effect before the start of the reach development effect is displayed again. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is a specific super reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), after the end of the shutter display in the reach development enable / disable effect, decorative patterns 9051, 9052, 9053 and The image of the meter MT is redisplayed, and the normal reach effect before the start of the reach development effect is developed (changed) to the super reach performance, and the super reach effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 62D1, when the normal reach effect is continued, the movable effect member 9060 is not operated and the level of the meter MT is not increased. Then, the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT are displayed in the same display manner as before the start of the reach development effect, and the normal reach effect is continued.

  When the super reach effect developed from the normal reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), the same effect as the movable effect member effect shown in FIG. 56 is executed. For example, in the display mode in which the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, and 9053 are reduced, the image is displayed by moving to the upper left corner of the image display device 905 (above the meter MT) and the character CG appears. Furthermore, the following meter effects are executed. The movable effect member 9060 is operated in a non-tilted state after being changed to the tilted state, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 according to the operation timing. Furthermore, in response to the operation of the movable effect member 9060, an effect of increasing the level of the meter MT is executed, and the super reach effect is developed.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (D2), when the super reach effect is developed, for example, the super reach effect as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 is executed, or another predetermined super reach effect is executed. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the meter MT being executed during the variable display is once erased in response to the start of the reach development availability effect which is a special effect, and then the movable effect member effect is executed. By performing display control that is redisplayed according to the above, it is possible to prevent the meter MT from interfering with the reach development propriety effect. Specifically, for example, when the reach development possibility effect is executed without once erasing the meter MT, the entire display area of the image display device 905 cannot be hidden, and the chance character image 9055 overlaps at least part of the display area. Therefore, the meter MT disturbs the reach development effect. However, when the re-display effect is executed after erasing the meter as shown in FIG. 62, the meter MT is prevented from interfering with the reach development possibility effect.

  In addition, the meter MT that is being executed during the variable display is once erased in response to the start of the reach development availability effect, which is a special effect, and then redisplayed according to the execution of the movable effect member effect. By performing the display control, when the meter does not accumulate, the display of the meter MT is continued in such a state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. .

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 62B and 62C, during the execution of reach development availability, the chance character image 9055 is displayed in a display area at least partially overlapping the display area in which the meter MT is displayed. Therefore, the meter MT is once erased in response to the start of the execution of reach development availability, so that the meter MT and the chance character image 9055 overlap with each other during the execution of reach development availability. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), the once-removed display of the meter MT or the like is performed when the meter effect including the operation effect of the movable effect member 9060 is executed during the execution of the reach development propriety effect. Therefore, the control regarding the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of re-display effects after erasing the meter]
Next, the execution timing of the meter effect and the like when the re-display effect after erasing the meter shown in FIG. 62 is executed will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram (timing chart) showing an example of the execution timing of the meter effect and the like when the re-display effect is executed after the meter is once erased. FIG. 63 shows an example of the timing of the reach effect, the tilt effect, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the meter effect, the reach development propriety effect, and whether or not the meter MT is displayed.

  FIG. 63 is an effect example in which the meter MT reaches LV1 during the development of the super reach, and the meter MT becomes MAX during the super reach and the special mode super reach effect is executed. In FIG. 63, an example in which the effect after the development to the super reach effect is shown as an example in which the same effect as the effect of FIG. 55 (A) is executed. Description of the production will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 63, when the display effect is executed after erasing the meter once, when reaching the reach state, first, the reach effect by the normal reach effect is executed. In the reach production, when the first time elapses from the start of the normal reach production, execution of the reach development possibility production (shutter display) is started, and the display of the meter MT (including the decorative design) displayed so far is once. Erased. Thereby, during the execution of the normal reach effect, as shown in FIG. 62C, the shutter image 9054 and the chance character image 9055 are displayed, and the reach development possibility effect in which the display of the meter MT and the like are once erased is started.

  Next, in the reach production, when the second time elapses from the start of the normal reach production, the execution of the reach development possibility production (shutter display) is ended. At that time, the meter MT (including decorative symbols) once deleted is displayed again. Thereby, at the end of the normal reach production, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), the meter MT and the like (including decorative symbols) once deleted are displayed again. In the case of developing to a super reach effect after the reach development enable / disable effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), a movable effect member effect is performed in which the movable effect member 9060 is operated, and the meter is adapted to the movable effect member effect. Meter production to increase the level of MT is executed.

[Example of re-display effect processing after erasing meter]
Next, the after-erasure-redisplay effect process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 for performing the after-erasure-redisplay effect described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63 will be described.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the re-display effect process after the meter is once erased. 64 is a process included in the above-described effect control process. Step S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 601 in the reach effect operation control process shown in FIG. This is executed as an alternative process of S90602 and S90603. 64 may be provided as a process constituting a part of the reach effect operation control process of FIG. 54. In addition to the reach effect operation control process of FIG. 54, the meter is once erased. As a dedicated process for executing the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern for executing the post-redisplay effect, it may be provided as a process executed only during a period until the start of the execution of the normal mode super reach effect.

  In the re-display effect process after erasing the meter, first, it is determined whether or not the current change display of the specific change pattern for which the re-display effect after erasing the meter is to be executed is performed (S90701). In S90701, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the specific variation pattern is being performed based on confirming the type of the command specifying the variation pattern received at the start of the variation display.

  If the variation display of the specific variation pattern is not being displayed in S90701, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation display of the specific variation pattern is being performed in S90701, it is determined whether or not the normal reach effect is currently being performed (S90702). In S90702, based on confirming the time schedule of the production progress determined in advance in the specific variation pattern in which the variation display is being executed, and the time value of the variation display timer that measures the time from the start of the variation display. Then, it is determined whether or not the present is during the execution period of the normal reach effect in the specific variation pattern. Such a determination is possible because the time schedule for the timing of the production progress is determined in advance for each variation pattern, and the production control for producing the production is executed based on the time value of the fluctuation display timer. It is.

  If it is determined in S90702 that the normal reach effect is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the first time has elapsed after the start of the normal reach effect (S90703). If it is determined in S90703 that the first time has not elapsed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S90703 that the first time has elapsed, the execution of reach development propriety effect with shutter display as shown in FIG. 62 (C) is started, and is displayed so far such as the meter MT. The image that has been erased is deleted (S90704), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in S90702 that the normal reach effect is being executed, the normal reach effect after the start of the normal reach effect is confirmed based on confirming the time schedule of the effect progress in the specific change pattern and the time value of the change display timer. It is determined whether or not the second time has passed (S90705). If it is determined in S90705 that the second time has not elapsed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S90705 that the second time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the currently executed variation pattern is developed into a super reach effect (S90706). In S90706, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern develops into super reach based on confirming the type of command specifying the variation pattern received at the start of variation display.

  If it is determined in S90706 that the variable display pattern develops into a super reach effect, execution of the effect for operating the movable effect member 9060 is started as shown in FIG. 62 (D2) (S90707). Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), in response to the operation of the movable effect member 9060, the shutter display is ended to complete the reach development possibility effect, and the once erased image such as the meter MT is superposed. The display is re-displayed in the effect form of the reach effect, the meter effect that increases the level of the meter MT is executed (S90708), and the process ends. As a result, the dynamic display effect develops from a normal reach effect to a super reach effect. Thereafter, the super reach effect is executed by the effect process provided separately from the display effect process after the meter is once erased.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90706 that the variable display pattern does not develop into a super reach effect, the movable effect member 9060 is not operated as shown in FIG. Is finished, and the image such as the meter MT once erased is redisplayed in the effect mode of the normal reach effect, the effect that does not increase the level of the meter MT is executed (S90709), and the process ends. Thereby, the effect of the variable display is continued with the normal reach effect. Thereafter, the normal reach effect is continued by the effect process provided separately from the display effect process after the meter is once erased.

[First modified example of redisplay effect after erasing meter]
Next, a first modification of the redisplay effect after erasing the meter will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 may continue to erase (not redisplay) the display of the meter MT and the like once erased as a redisplay effect after erasing the meter. For example, a plurality of specific variation patterns for executing the reach development enable / disable effect are provided. Among them, for the first specific change pattern, the display of the meter MT or the like once deleted in the reach development enable / disable effect is displayed at the time of super reach development. Redisplayed for the second specific variation pattern, the display of the meter MT etc. once erased in the reach development allowance effect is not redisplayed during the development of the super reach, and the subsequent reach effect (developed to the super reach effect) (Including both during the reach production in the case and during the reach production when it does not develop into the super reach production), it may continue to be erased and redisplayed after the end of the variable display.

  Even in the case where the display such as the meter MT that has been once deleted in the reach development enable / disable effect is executed when the control is not redisplayed during the development of the super reach, the operation of the movable effect member 9060 during the subsequent super reach effect, etc. When the meter effect accompanied by is executed, the meter MT or the like once deleted may be displayed again.

  In addition, after erasing the display of the meter MT or the like in the reach development enable / disable effect, at least one of the reach effect in the case of developing to the super reach effect and the reach effect in the case of not developing to the super reach effect is deleted. The display on the meter MT or the like may be always erased.

  According to such a first modified example, since the display control for continuing the erased state of the display of the meter MT etc. once erased with the start of execution of the reach development availability effect can be executed, the meter MT It is possible to diversify the control related to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

[Second modification of re-display effect after erasing meter]
Next, a second modification of the redisplay effect after erasing the meter will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 once erases the meter as a redisplay effect, temporarily erases the meter MT when the display value of the meter MT is less than a predetermined value, and temporarily displays the meter MT when the display value of the meter MT is greater than or equal to the predetermined value. An effect that is not erased may be executed. For example, when the display value of the meter MT is less than the maximum value, the meter MT is temporarily deleted, and when the display value of the meter MT is the maximum value, an effect that does not delete the meter MT is executed.

  When the display value of the meter MT is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it is considered that the player has a sense of superiority with respect to others and a sense of expectation for a state advantageous to the player because the meter has accumulated. When the display value of the meter MT is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, an effect corresponding to the player's psychological state can be executed by executing an effect that does not erase the meter MT. On the other hand, when the display value of the meter MT is less than the predetermined value, it is considered that the player is not interested in the meter MT because the meter is not accumulated. In order to preferentially execute other effects, an effect corresponding to the psychological state of the player can be executed by executing an effect of once erasing the meter MT.

  In the case of performing an effect in which the meter MT is not erased once when the display value of the meter MT is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the chance character shown in FIG. The following presentation control may be performed on the display position (display area) of the image 9055. The display position of the chance character image 9055 may be changed to a position that does not overlap with the display position (display area) of the meter MT. You may make it restrict | limit (for example, prohibit) an effect so that the effect by the display of the chance character image 9055 may not be performed. In the case where such effect control is executed, for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the chance character image 9055 is displayed (for example, when the chance character image 9055 is displayed by lottery and is a big hit) Is set so that the expectation to the big hit when the display value of the meter MT is equal to or higher than the predetermined value is higher than that when the ratio is displayed by lottery than when it is lost. In this case, the player's attention tends to be gathered toward the display value of the meter MT, so that the player is prevented from feeling dissatisfied by changing the display control of the chance character image 9055.

  According to the second modified example, the control according to the display mode of the display mode such as the meter MT when the execution of the reach development possibility start is executed for the temporary deletion of the meter MT or the like is executed. The control related to the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Main effects obtained by re-displaying the meter after erasing]
(1) As shown in FIG. 62, after the meter MT being executed during the variable display is once erased in response to the start of the reach development availability effect which is a special effect, the movable effect member By performing display control that is redisplayed according to the execution of the effect, the meter MT can be prevented from interfering with the reach development effect.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 62B and 62C, during the execution of reach development possibility display, the chance character image 9055 is displayed in a display area at least partially overlapping the display area where the meter MT is displayed. As a result, the meter MT is once erased when the execution of the reach development propriety effect is started, so that the meter MT and the chance character image 9055 overlap each other during the execution of the reach development propriety effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the property.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 62 (D2), when the meter display including the operation effect of the movable effect member 9060 is executed while the re-display of the meter MT or the like once erased is being executed, Since it is executed, the control related to the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4) As shown in the first modified example, the display control for continuing the erased state of the display such as the meter MT once erased in response to the start of the execution of reach development possibility can be executed. Control related to MT can be diversified, and the fun of games can be improved.

  (5) As shown in the second modification, for the erasure of the meter MT and the like, the control corresponding to the display mode of the display mode such as the meter MT when execution of the reach development effect is started is executed. As a result, control related to the meter MT can be diversified, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 56, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed before the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed and when it is not executed, the super reach effect is being executed. The notice effect was executed before the meter effect was executed by changing the amount of change of the meter when changing the display mode of the meter MT in the meter effect and the amount of oval displayed as the predetermined effect. Since the case where the display mode of the meter MT is changed in the meter effect is different between the case and the case where it is not executed, the interest of the meter effect that can change the display mode of the meter MT can be improved.

  (7) As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, by deleting the adjustment result image R during the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the display result that is derived and displayed.

[Other examples of re-display effects after erasing the meter]
(1) “Re-display effect after once erasing the meter” shows, as an example, a normal reach effect and a reach development effect as a “special effect” that is a condition for once erasing the meter MT. However, the “special effects” are not limited to this, and the normal reach effects alone (normal reach effects that do not involve reach development effects), super reach effects, notices (such as jackpot notices, reach notices, etc.) effects, pseudo-reed effects, and Other effects such as a sliding effect may be used. Further, the “special effect” may include an effect using a movable body. The effect used as the “special effect” is desirably an effect that is highly valuable to the player, such as the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

  (2) “Re-display effect after once erasing meter” is shown as an example of a change effect that can change the meter MT. The meter effect is an effect operation of the movable effect member 9060, an effect of displaying an effect image such as an oval, an effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit value of the meter (level 4 (MAX)), and display of the meter This is a change effect including an effect of changing the aspect toward the lower limit of the meter. Change effects include effects that change the type and number of items, effects that change the character (size, color, number, etc.), and effects that increase or decrease the number. May be executed. In addition to the meter MT, a change effect that can change the meter MT is an effect that only the effect operation of the movable effect member 9060 is performed, an effect that displays only the effect image in addition to the meter MT, and a meter MT. Other effects such as an effect of displaying a specific character image acting on the meter MT may be used.

  (3) “Re-display effect after once erasing meter” shows an example in which the meter MT is once erased at the same time as the start of execution of a special effect such as reach development effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the “re-display effect after once erasing the meter” is not limited as long as the meter MT is temporarily deleted when the execution of the special effect is started. The meter MT may be temporarily deleted when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start.

  (4) “Re-display effect after once erasing meter” is shown as an example of an effect in which the meter MT is re-displayed at the same time as the end of execution of the special effect such as the reach development effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the “re-display effect after erasing the meter once” indicates that the meter MT is displayed at the timing after the execution of the special effect is finished (for example, the timing immediately before the end of the variable display, the timing after the end of the variable display, etc.). It may be displayed again.

  (5) For the shutter image 9054 displayed in the reach development allowance effect as the special effect, the image color may be selected from a plurality of colors and displayed so that the image color varies depending on the expectation level resulting in the jackpot display result. The image color may be selected from a plurality of colors and displayed so that the image color varies depending on the degree of expectation to develop into super reach.

  (6) In the “display re-display effect after erasing the meter once”, the meter MT is temporarily deleted when a special effect such as reach development effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, In another configuration in which another image display device is provided, the meter MT that has been once erased is displayed on the other image display device in an effect mode in which the meter MT is moved to the other image display device and displayed. It may be continued. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when another image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 905, the meter MT that has been once erased may be displayed again on the other image display device. Good.

  (7) The shutter image 9054 (which may include the chance character image 9055) used in the reach development permission / prohibition effect as a special effect may be executed as an effect dedicated to the reach development permission / prohibition effect, and the background image of the decorative design is changed. It may be displayed in common with other effects such as a scene change such as a change of the effect mode. As described above, when images that are displayed in common in a plurality of types of effects are used for special effects, in an image display device that displays images for effects in a plurality of layers, a plurality of types of images are used as the images used for the special effects. It may be displayed on the same level in production, or may be displayed on different levels. When displaying images used for special effects at the same level in multiple types of effects, if the level of the image is set to be displayed at the level on the front side of the level displaying the image of the meter MT, It is possible to make it appear that the image of the meter MT is easily erased in such a manner that the image of the meter MT is concealed by the image used for the special effect of the front side hierarchy without erasing the image of the meter MT. it can.

  (8) “Re-display effect after once erasing meter” shows an example in which an effect that does not change the level of the meter MT when the normal reach effect is continued as shown in FIG. 62 (D1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the normal reach effect is continued, the effect of changing the level of the meter MT including the effect operation of the movable effect member 9060 and the display of the effect may be provided. In that case, the reach effect may be executed in the effect mode of the normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 62 (D1). In other words, the same meter effect may be executed when the super reach effect is developed and when the normal reach effect is continued. The meter effect is executed when the super reach effect is developed and when the normal reach effect is continued. However, the level change amount of the meter MT is different (for example, the normal reach effect is more developed when the super reach effect is developed). For example, the amount of level change may be larger than the other).

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said form, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and includes a part of the configuration described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be.

[Other configuration examples]
(1) In order to achieve the purpose of improving the interest of changing effects such as changing the display mode of a predetermined display such as a meter effect, the gaming machine described above has the following configuration. A game machine for performing a game (for example, a pachinko machine 901 or the like) and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a notice effect in a meter change notification mode) ) And change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that can change the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific stage (for example, the display mode of the meter MT is changed toward the upper limit value of the meter (level 4 (MAX)). Effects that change the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit of the meter (level 0), effects that change the type and number of items, effects that change the size, color, number of characters, etc. The effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing effects in which numbers increase or decrease, etc., and the change effect execution means In the change effect, the mode of changing the display mode of the predetermined display is different depending on whether the specific effect is executed or not executed (for example, during the super reach effect). When the display effect of the meter MT is changed in the meter effect during the super reach effect depending on whether the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is performed or not performed before the meter effect is performed. The amount of change in the meter and the amount of oval displayed as a predetermined effect are varied). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect that changes the display mode of the predetermined display.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the change effect execution means is configured to display the predetermined display rather than a case where the specific effect is executed before the change effect is executed. (For example, if a notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed before executing the meter effect in the super reach effect, the meter in the meter effect in the super reach effect is performed. If the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed before executing the meter effect during the super reach effect, the meter is changed in the meter effect during the super reach effect. It is characterized in that only one level or two levels are changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the specific effect will be executed.

  (3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in any one of a plurality of execution periods (for example, meter change) As a notice effect in the notification mode, when the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 4 levels, the notice effect for 8 seconds is executed, and the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect is In the case of the 3rd level, a notice effect for 4 seconds is executed). According to such a structure, the interest of a specific effect can be improved.

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), suggested effect execution means (for example, in a meter change notification mode) capable of executing an suggested effect that suggests whether or not the specific effect is executed. And an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing an aoria effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the specific performance will be executed.

  (5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), special effect execution means (for example, a special effect can be executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing to a specific stage) It is further provided with an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a special aspect super reach effect in response to the display mode of the meter MT changing to MAX. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the display mode of the predetermined display changes to a specific stage.

  (6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), adjustment image display means capable of displaying an adjustment image for adjusting the effect of the production (for example, when the volume is adjusted, the volume adjustment result And the adjustment image display means displays an adjustment result image in a predetermined area of the image display device 905 in a form superimposed with the effect image and the demo image. Corresponding to being derived, the adjustment image is rendered invisible or difficult to view (for example, the adjustment result image R is deleted during the derived display period T2 of the variable display result). According to such a structure, it can suppress that the visibility of a variable display result falls.

  (Modification 1) In the above, the display mode of the meter was set to five levels from level 0 to level 4. However, the display mode of the meter is not limited to five levels. For example, the display mode of the meter may be set to 4 steps or less or 6 steps or more.

  (Modification 2) In the above, the timing at which the display mode of the meter is changed is high-speed fluctuation based on the effect control pattern selected in step S90406 corresponding to the content set in step S90403. The display mode of the meter was changed so that it was in the middle or super reach production. However, for example, the level is changed at every predetermined timing such as the start timing of the variable display, the start timing of the notice effect, the timing when the character image is displayed, and the timing when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Alternatively, the display mode of the meter may be changed by determining how many steps are changed. Further, when the notice effect or the character image display is executed a plurality of times during one variable display, the notice effect, the character image display, or the notice effect and the character image display are executed at each timing. In addition, the display mode of the meter may be changed. In addition, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, when the pseudo-continuous variation is performed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter may be changed at each timing when the pseudo-continuous variation is performed.

  (Variation 3) In the above, the meter display is changed in the variable display where the special aspect super reach effect is executed to change the display mode of the meter. However, for example, the meter effect may be executed in a variable display performed before the variable display in which the special aspect super reach effect is executed. Specifically, the variable display capable of executing the special mode super reach effect is set as the variable display of the notice target, and the meter effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays performed before the variable display of the notice target. The meter effect may be executed in the variable display performed immediately before the variable display to be notified. When the meter effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays, the display mode of the meter may be changed one by one each time the variable display is executed, or each time the variable display is executed, The step of changing the display mode may be determined, and the display mode of the meter may be changed based on the determination result.

  In addition, when the variable display in which the display mode of the meter is randomly changed over a plurality of variable displays to level 3 and the special mode super reach effect is executed is started, the special mode super reach effect is executed. In the variable display, the meter display mode may be changed to the MAX display mode by piggybacking on the special mode super reach effect.

  (Modification 4) In the above, in step S90504, the reaching level of the meter during high-speed fluctuation is determined by lottery. However, the level reached during high-speed fluctuation of the meter is not limited to that by lottery. For example, one high-speed fluctuation reaching level may be set in advance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a plurality of high-speed fluctuation reaching levels may be set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns. In this case, it may be determined by lottery which of the plurality of high-speed fluctuation reaching levels is selected. Moreover, you may determine the arrival level during the high-speed fluctuation | variation of a meter based on the kind of notification effect performed, execution time, etc.

  (Modification 5) In the above embodiment, when performing a meter effect that becomes a frustration, in step S90507, the final arrival level of the meter is determined by lottery, and in step S90508, the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation of the meter is drawn by lottery. Determined by. However, determination of the final level of the meter and the level reached during high-speed fluctuation is not limited to lottery. For example, one final arrival level or high-speed fluctuation arrival level may be set in advance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Also, a plurality of final arrival levels and high-speed fluctuation arrival levels may be set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, it is only necessary to determine by lottery which one of a plurality of final arrival levels or high-speed fluctuation arrival levels is selected. Further, the final arrival level of the meter and the arrival level during high-speed fluctuation may be determined based on the type of announcement effect to be executed, the execution time, and the like. In the case of executing a meter effect that is a frustration, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the meter to the MAX display mode.

  (Modification 6) In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the special aspect super reach effect is determined in advance such that the special aspect super reach effect starts at the timing 44 seconds after the variable display starts. Oita. However, the execution timing of the special aspect super reach effect is not limited to a predetermined timing. For example, the execution timing of the special aspect super reach effect may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of execution timings.

  (Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the special aspect super reach effect is set to an aspect that can enhance the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit”, and the period in which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed The normal aspect super reach production executed in the period corresponding to is an aspect in which the feeling of expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” cannot be increased so much. However, the special aspect super reach effect or the normal aspect super reach effect that is executed in a period corresponding to the period in which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, the special aspect super reach effect is set as an effect form that hits a big hit with many appearances, and the normal aspect super reach effect that is executed in a period corresponding to a period in which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed is substantially It is good also as a production aspect which hits the big hit and the small hit which cannot get out. And the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state in which a game is obtained after the special mode super reach effect is executed is set to 60%, for example, and the normal mode in the period corresponding to the period in which the special mode super reach effect can be executed. For example, the percentage controlled to the big hit gaming state in which no play is obtained after the super reach production is executed is set to 40%, for example, the big hit expectation degree when the special mode super reach production is executed, You may attach high and low to the jackpot expectation degree when a normal mode super reach production is performed in the period equivalent to the period which can perform a mode super reach production.

  (Modification 8) In the above-described embodiment, the notice effect in the effect mode other than the meter change notification mode is an effect for notifying that there is a possibility of being in the big hit gaming state. However, the notice effect of the effect modes other than the meter change notification mode is not limited to the effect of notifying that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit gaming state. For example, a notice effect in an effect mode other than the meter change notification mode may be an effect for notifying that there is a possibility that a game state such as a probability change state may occur after the variable display result becomes “big hit”. In this case, for example, a probability variation determination device may be provided. The probability variation determination device includes, for example, a region that changes between an easy-to-enter state in which a game ball easily enters and a difficult-to-enter state in which a game ball is difficult to enter. The area of the probability variation determination device may be anything that changes to an easy entry state in, for example, a round game in a big hit game state. The game ball that has passed through the area enters the probability variation determination device. In addition, the probability variation determination device is provided with a specific area in which a game ball that has passed through the area can enter. The payout of the winning ball may be performed based on the game ball entering at least one of the winning opening, the specific area, and the non-specific area. In such a pachinko gaming machine, for example, when a game ball that has passed through a winning opening enters a specific area, it becomes a probabilistic state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, at the start of variable display, instead of the big hit type, a mode for changing the region to the easy entry state is determined from a plurality of types. Depending on the determined mode, the time required to enter the easy entry state varies. As a result, depending on the determined mode, the possibility of whether or not the state is likely to be changed afterwards changes.

  (Modification 9) In the above embodiment, the meter has a predetermined display. However, the predetermined display is not limited to the meter. The predetermined display may be an item, a character, a number, or the like, for example. When the predetermined display is an item, for example, the type and number of items may be changed. When the predetermined display is a character, for example, the size, color, number of people, etc. of the character may be changed. When the predetermined display is a number, for example, the number may be increased or decreased. An effect instead of the meter effect may be executed using such a predetermined display. That is, the predetermined display is, for example, that the meter value changes stepwise to finally become a specific value, the item type changes stepwise to become a specific type, and the number of items is stepped. Change to a specific number, character size changes stepwise to a specific size, character color changes stepwise to a specific color, number of characters It may be anything that changes step by step up to a specific step, such as changing in steps to become a specific number of people, or changing numbers in steps to a specific number. And changing in stages means that, for example, the meter value increases or decreases, the item type changes to one of a plurality of preset types, the number of items increases or decreases, Predetermined indications such as the size increasing or decreasing, the character color changing to one of a plurality of preset types, the number of characters increasing or decreasing, and the number increasing or decreasing It does not always change toward a specific stage, but the predetermined display changes toward a specific stage (for example, if the stage at the start of the change is level 0 and the specific stage is level 4, the level increases) Change to a stage opposite to a specific stage (for example, if the stage at the start of the change is level 0 and the specific stage is level 4, the level may decrease) ) Or it may be repeated.

  (Modification 10) In the above embodiment, the meter MT is always displayed as the predetermined display regardless of whether or not the meter effect is being executed. However, the meter MT as the predetermined display may be displayed only when the meter effect is executed. In that case, the meter MT as a predetermined display may be displayed although the meter effect is not executed. By setting it as such a mode, if meter MT is displayed as a predetermined display, a player's expectation that meter production will be performed can be raised.

  (Modification 11) In the above embodiment, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed only immediately before the meter effect during the super reach effect. However, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode may be executed immediately before the effect period of the meter effect that can be executed at other timing, such as a meter effect during high-speed fluctuation. By setting it as such an aspect, a player's expectation that meter production will be performed at various timings can be raised.

  (Modification 12) In the above embodiment, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a super A super reach effect is executed or a change pattern in which a super B super reach effect is executed. If it is a variation pattern in which the effect is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 can ensure and execute the effect time of the special aspect super reach effect. However, in the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, a different variation pattern is prepared depending on whether or not to execute the special aspect super reach effect and the effect time when executing the special aspect super reach effect. The CPU 90120 for effect control only has the specified effect time and the specified effect time when the execution of the special aspect super reach effect is specified according to the change pattern specification command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In this way, the special aspect super reach production may be executed. By adopting such an aspect, processing for determining whether or not to execute the special aspect super reach effect by the effect control CPU 90120, and the effect time when executing the special aspect super reach effect is omitted. The processing load can be suppressed.

  (Modification 13) In the above embodiment, when the meter display mode changes to MAX in the meter effect, the special mode super reach effect is always executed. However, even if the meter display mode changes to MAX in the meter effect, the special mode super reach effect may not be executed. In that case, even if the display mode of the meter changes up to MAX in the meter effect, the fact that the special mode super reach effect is not executed is determined only when the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, at a sufficiently small ratio It may be made possible. By adopting such a mode, even if the meter display mode changes to MAX in the meter production, if the special mode super reach production is not executed, the variable display result becomes “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Can be announced in a definite way.

  (Modification 14) In the above embodiment, 1 is used when variable display is started in order to notify the CPU 90120 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the variable display mode such as the variable display time of the decorative design and the type of reach effect. Although an example in which one variation pattern designation command is transmitted is shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command as a variable before the reach, such as presence / absence of variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous”. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after reaching reach, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted as the second command You may do it. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects the specific variable display mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command is sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command is sent. You may make it do. Further, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the variation pattern designation command.

  (Modification 15) The present invention can be applied not only to a pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that can perform a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are, for example, a plurality of types of identification information, and that can be assigned a predetermined game value based on the game result. A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and a display result of a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable is derived and displayed This is a gaming machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, hardware resources including an image display device of the slot machine and software for performing a predetermined process cooperate to provide all or part of the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 901. What is necessary is just to be comprised.

  Slot machines are not limited to those in which bets are set using medals and credits as gaming values, but slot machines that set betting numbers using gaming balls as gaming values, or credits only as gaming values. It may be a full credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. Is equivalent to setting The pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, but for example, a plurality of types of medals and gaming balls, etc. The game value may be used together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and when a prize is generated, such as medals and game balls Any of a plurality of types of gaming value may be paid out.

  As an effect that can be executed in such a slot machine, a notice effect or a meter effect in the meter change notification mode may be included.

  (Modification 16) In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the predetermined effect such as the notice effect, the sound output operation in the speaker, The various effect operations including the lighting operation of the game effect lamp and the decoration LED can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

  (Modification 17) A program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed and provided on a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine. It is not limited to the form, and a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device in advance may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  (Modification 18) The game execution form is not only executed by mounting a detachable recording medium, but the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. are temporarily stored in the internal memory or the like. It is also possible to adopt a form that can be executed by the above, or a form that is directly executed using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected through a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (Modification 19) In the above description, “the ratios are different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. : B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios such as 0%.

  (Modification 20) In the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and ornamental patterns “1” to “8” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not restricted to an aspect. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (Modification 21) In the above embodiment, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  (Modification 22) In the above embodiment, a random number value determination table is stored in the main substrate 9011, and the main substrate 9011 is used for determining a random value based on the random value extracted in the main substrate 9011 at the time of a winning prize. An example is shown in which a random number determination process is performed with reference to the table, and the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined in the main board 9011 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the random value determination table, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random value itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute a random number determination process, and may receive a determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random number value, determines whether or not to win a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot, and based on the random value, the main board 9011. The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in (1) may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

  (Modification 23) In the above embodiment, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated on the side of the effect control board 9012 when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. Explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an interrupt for receiving a presentation control command may be generated by an interrupt request using the first bit of serial communication.

  In addition, it should be thought that the form disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 Production display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
901 Pachinko machine 90120 CPU for effect control
9060 Movable production member MT Meter 9055 Chance character image R Adjustment result image 901 Pachinko gaming machine 90120 Production control CPU
9060 Movable production member MT Meter 9055 Chance character image R Adjustment result image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of displaying a change and playing a game,
An abnormality determination means capable of determining an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities;
When an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, if the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being reported, the notification is terminated, and the determined abnormality is notified Abnormality notification means;
State control means for controlling the state corresponding to the determined abnormality based on the abnormality being determined by the abnormality determination unit;
Equipped with a,
And it can be determined a plurality of anomalies which are controlled in a game stopped by the previous SL state control means,
The abnormality notification means is configured such that when the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state in which a predetermined external output signal is output , the abnormality priority is higher than the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state. It continued high unusually corresponding field new event has occurred that case, before Symbol notification of abnormality that triggered the control of a predetermined state,
The output of the predetermined external output signal does not change even when a new event corresponding to an abnormality having a high priority of the abnormality occurs,
A gaming machine characterized by that.